JP7494995B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device, which in turn is equipped with a control board. The control board is constructed by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-56284 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the control device needs to have an optimal structure, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that allows for an optimal control device structure.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game machine comprising: a control board for controlling a game;
a board box that houses the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A predetermined connector is mounted on a predetermined surface of the control board,
a connection opening through which a predetermined connector is inserted to enable connection of a signal transmission means to the predetermined connector is formed in the board box;
a positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set such that a distance between a predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and a predetermined peripheral portion facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening is shorter than a distance between a specific side surface of the predetermined connector that is present on the opposite side of the body of the predetermined connector from the predetermined side surface and a specific peripheral portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening,
The predetermined connector is
an engagement means provided on the predetermined side surface so as to be located closer to a free end of the predetermined connector than an area facing the connection opening, the engagement means engaging with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
a predetermined connection means that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board and extends along the predetermined plate surface between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion of the connection opening;
Equipped with
The substrate box has an opposing portion that faces the predetermined plate surface,
The engaging means is located on the opposing portion closer to the predetermined plate surface than a portion furthest from the predetermined plate surface.

The present invention makes it possible to provide an optimal structure for the control device.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 1A to 1J are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 1A and 1B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. An explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area. FIG. (a) is a front view of the main control unit, (b) is a front view of the main control unit showing an enlarged view of the fifth connector, (c) is a front view of the main control unit showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector, and (d) is a front view of the main control unit showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector. 1A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of the main control board, and FIG. 1B is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the connector group mounting area. 1A is a plan view of a first connector, FIG. 1B is a plan view of a second connector, FIG. 1C is a plan view of a third connector, and FIG. 8(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 8(a) showing the periphery of the first connector, and FIG. 8(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8(a) showing the periphery of the second connector. 8(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 8(a) showing the periphery of the third connector, and FIG. 8(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 8(a) showing the periphery of the fourth connector. This is an oblique view of the main control device from the front side. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the front side. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the rear side. 1A is a front view of a front case body, and FIG. 1B is a front view of a rear case body. (a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control device when cut along a cutting plane passing through the first connector and the sixth connector (line E-E in Figure 8 (a)); (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the first guide portion; and (c) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the second guide portion. 8A and 8B are longitudinal cross-sectional views of the main control unit taken along a cutting plane (line E-E in FIG. 8A) passing through the first connector and the sixth connector during the process of assembling the main control unit. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the rear first case fixing boss before the front case body is guided upward by the second guide portion, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the rear first case fixing boss after the front case body is guided upward by the second guide portion. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 2 is a block diagram showing a connection between an MPU and various electronic devices. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal of the first connector. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal of the second connector, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal of the third connector, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal of the fourth connector. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a first special chart, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for a second special chart. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the dispensing side timer interrupt processing in the dispensing side CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a payout status receiving process in the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the payout output processing in the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart special power control processing in the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing in the main CPU. (a) is a front view of the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a front view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the fifth connector, (c) is a front view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector, and (d) is a front view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the front side. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the rear side. 34(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 34(a) showing the periphery of the first connector, and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 34(a) showing the periphery of the second connector. 34(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 34(a) showing the periphery of the third connector, and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a) showing the periphery of the fourth connector. A longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control device when cut along a cutting plane passing through the first connector and the sixth connector (line E-E in Figure 34 (a)). FIG. 13A is a front view of the main control device in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the areas around the first to fourth connectors. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the front side. This is an exploded oblique view of the main control device from the rear side. 40(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 40(a) showing the periphery of the first connector, and FIG. 40(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 40(a) showing the periphery of the second connector. 40(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40(a) showing the periphery of the third connector, and FIG. 40(b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 40(a) showing the periphery of the fourth connector. 1A is a front view of a front case body, and FIG. 1B is a front view of a rear case body. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the rear first case fixing boss before the front case body is slid upward, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the front first case fixing boss and the screw hole formed in the rear first case fixing boss after the front case body is slid upward. 13A is a plan view showing an element mounting surface of a main control board in a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged portion of an MPU. 48(a) is a plan view showing the solder surface of the main control board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 48(a). 13 is a flowchart showing a fraud detection process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for monitoring unauthorized actions in a power-off state in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-on setting process executed by a main CPU. 13A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of a main control board in a sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged portion of the MPU. 53(a) is a plan view showing the rear surface of the main control board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 53(a). 13A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of a main control board in a seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the center area. 10 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by a main CPU. 4A to 4G are time charts showing how processing is performed during a power outage. 13A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of a main control board in an eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the center area.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected at all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating a launching operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 has multiple openings of various sizes that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are dispensed. On the other hand, for the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed when a ball enters. Specifically, when a ball enters the first operating opening 33, three prize balls are dispensed, when a ball enters the second operating opening 34, one prize ball is dispensed, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen prize balls are dispensed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have fewer prize balls than the first actuation port 33, but the specific number of prize balls may be different from that described above. The number of prize balls may be the same for the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34, or the second actuation port 34 may have a greater number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "ball entry" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area PA, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 24a, game balls entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are also referred to as winning.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are united as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are open upward. In addition, both actuation ports 33, 34 are lined up vertically with the first actuation port 33 facing upward. The second actuation port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second actuation port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second actuation port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after entering. This makes it possible for a game ball that enters the through gate 35 to enter the second operating port 34.

When a ball wins the through gate 35, the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a ball wins the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38 located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning electric role release, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the normal power open state is entered. In the normal power open state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured with a segment display in which a number of segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. The image displayed on the map display unit 38a may be a number of different types of letters, a number of symbols, a number of characters, or a number of colors that are switched between.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by the entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The lottery result is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special chart unit 37 in detail, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display section 37a and a second special chart display section 37b. The display area of the first special chart display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special chart display section 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the area of the combined display area of the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b is also narrower than the display surface 41a.

In the first special symbol display section 37a, a winning lottery is held using the winning entry into the first operating port 33 as a trigger, and a variable display of the pattern or a specified display is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special symbol display section 37b, a winning lottery is held using the winning entry into the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and a variable display of the pattern or a specified display is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b are configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the images displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

In the special chart unit 37, a first special chart reserve display section 37c and a second special chart reserve display section 37d are provided adjacent to the first special chart display section 37a and the second special chart display section 37b. The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the first special chart reserve display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 can be reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special chart reserve display section 37d.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the pattern display device 41, when a pattern change or a specified display is performed in the first special pattern display section 37a based on a winning entry in the first operating port 33, a pattern change or a specified display is performed accordingly, and when a pattern change or a specified display is performed in the second special pattern display section 37b based on a winning entry in the second operating port 34, a pattern change or a specified display is performed accordingly. In addition to display effects triggered by winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the pattern display device 41 also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode described below, which is entered after a winning entry is achieved.

The display contents when the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern will be described in detail with reference to Figures 4 and 5. Figures 4(a) to (j) are diagrams individually showing the patterns that are displayed in a changing manner by the pattern display device 41, and Figures 5(a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to (j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower rows, set as multiple display areas. Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper pattern row Z1 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern arranged between each main pattern. The lower pattern row Z3 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern arranged between each main pattern.

In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, the middle pattern row Z2 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", and one sub-pattern arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone has 10 main patterns arranged, making up a total of 20 patterns. Then, on the display surface 41a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display surface 41a is configured to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 pattern. Also, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five active lines are set on the display surface 41a, namely, a left line L1, a center line L2, a right line L3, a downward-right line L4, and an upward-right line L5.

When the display surface 41a displays a variable pattern based on the winning of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the variable display starts so that the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper pattern row Z1 → the lower pattern row Z3 → the middle pattern row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined patterns being statically displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Also, when the variable display of the patterns ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 4R high probability jackpot result, an 8R high probability jackpot result, a 12R high probability jackpot result A, or a 16R high probability jackpot result, a combination of the same odd number patterns or a combination of the same even number patterns is formed on any of the valid lines, and if the result of the internal lottery is an 8R low probability jackpot result, a 12R low probability jackpot result, or a 12R high probability jackpot result B, a combination of the same even number patterns is formed on any of the valid lines. Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high probability big win result or a small win result, which will be described later, a specified combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") will be formed on one of the active lines.

In addition, based on a winning entry into any of the operating ports 33, 34, display begins on any of the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and one game round is played until a predetermined result is displayed and the game ends. In addition, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as symbols may be used.

If a big prize or a small prize is won in the lottery based on winning through the first operating port 33, the mode will transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning through the special electric winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, if a big prize or a small prize is won in the lottery based on winning through the second operating port 34, the mode will transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning through the special electric winning device 32 is possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if an internal lottery is selected to transition to an open/close execution mode. The open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode is transitioned when a winning result is obtained. Note that while a winning entry is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which a winning entry is more difficult to occur than in the open state.

The round display unit 39 displays the number of rounds that occur in the open/close execution mode. Here, the open/close execution mode includes a round number-defined mode that occurs when a big win is won, and an open/close number-defined mode that occurs when a small win is won. The round number-defined mode is an open/close execution mode that is executed with a predetermined number of rounds as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric winning device 32. The number of rounds that are executed in the round number-defined mode differs depending on the type of big win result that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 displays the number of rounds or a display corresponding to it. In addition, the display on this round display unit 39 starts when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, the open/close number-specified mode is terminated when round play is not set and either one of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes reaches the upper limit, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the special electric winning device 32. In the open/close number-specified mode, the round display unit 39 remains in a non-display state.

Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the game board 24, discharge passages 42-48 are formed corresponding to the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Game balls that flow into the discharge passages 42-48 flow down the discharge passages 42-48 and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are collected in a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The game balls collected in the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each discharge passage section 42-48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a-48a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 42-48 and detection sensors 42a-48a will be described below. As already explained, four general winning openings 31 are provided, and therefore discharge passage sections 42-44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided for each of the first discharge passage section 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage section 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the first discharge passage section 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so that its detection range is located midway through the second discharge passage section 43. A game ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and a game ball that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the left is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage section 44 is provided for the two general winning openings 31 on the right side, which are formed to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and the entrance side areas merge midway to form one exit side area. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the exit side area in the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters either of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

The fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 45, and the game ball that entered the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 45. The fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that entered the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 46. The sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the game ball that entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a while passing through the sixth discharge passage section 47. A seventh discharge passage section 48 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and a game ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage section 48.

A gaming ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a-48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

The various detection sensors 42a-49a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-49a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted into it. The window panel 52 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are also provided to output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56, which bulge toward the front, are arranged vertically below the window 51. An upper tray 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 56a also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described. Figure 7 is a rear view of the inner frame 13, Figure 8(a) is a front view of the main control device 60, Figure 8(b) is a front view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of the fifth connector CN5 provided on the main control device 60, Figure 8(c) is a front view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector CN6 provided on the main control device 60, and Figure 8(d) is a front view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector CN7 provided on the main control device 60. Details of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control device 60 and the sound and light emission control device 70 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). As shown in FIG. 8(a), the main control device 60 has a main control board 61 that has the function of mainly controlling the game (specifically, the MPU 63 described below) and the function of monitoring the power supply (specifically, the power outage monitoring circuit 201 described below). The main control device 60 is configured with the main control board 61 housed in a board box 62. The specific configuration of the main control device 60 will be described in detail later.

The audio and light emission control device 70 (Fig. 7) is equipped with an audio and light emission control board (not shown) that controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (Fig. 1), the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 (Fig. 1), and the display control device described below in accordance with instructions from the main control device 60. The audio and light emission control device 70 is configured with the audio and light emission control board housed in a board box 70a (Fig. 7).

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply and launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition to the payout mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74, the back pack 72 is also provided with an external terminal board 79. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the rear of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 is a board that outputs a predetermined signal to make the gaming hall's management computer recognize the status of the pachinko machine 10, and also inputs a predetermined signal from the gaming hall's management computer to the pachinko machine 10. The management computer receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79.

<Configuration of main control device 60>
Next, the configuration of the main control device 60 will be described. First, the specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be described. Fig. 9(a) is a plan view showing an element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Note that in Fig. 9(a), the wiring pattern formed on the surface of the main control board 61 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the main control board 61 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle, and has a pair of long sides 61a, 61b and a pair of short sides 61c, 61d. The main control board 61 is an insulating board, specifically a paper-phenol board manufactured by impregnating paper with phenol resin, but is not limited to this as long as it is an insulating board, and may be, for example, a glass-epoxy board manufactured by impregnating glass cloth with epoxy resin.

One side of the main control board 61 is an element mounting surface 61e on which the MPU 63, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements 91 to 94 are mounted. The main control board 61 is a double-sided board in which wiring patterns are formed on the element mounting surface 61e and on the back surface of the main control board 61, which is the board surface opposite the element mounting surface 61e. Note that the main control board 61 is not limited to being a double-sided board, and may be a single-sided board in which the wiring pattern is formed on only one of the board surfaces of the main control board 61.

On one long side 61a of the main control board 61 (the upper side in FIG. 9(a)), there is provided a connector group mounting area 88 on which the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3 and the fourth connector CN4 are mounted. FIG. 9(b) is a plan view of the main control board 61 showing an enlarged view of the connector group mounting area 88. The first connector CN1 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 to the payout control device 77, the power supply/launch control device 78, and the external terminal board 79, the second connector CN2 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 to the first operation port detection sensor 46a, the third connector CN3 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 to the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and the fourth connector CN4 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 to electronic components such as the first winning port detection sensor 42a, the second winning port detection sensor 43a, the third winning port detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. Details of the connection between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and various electronic components will be described later.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in a row along one long side 61a of the main control board 61, and the connector group mounting area 88 extends along the long side 61a. As shown in FIG. 9(a), on the other long side 61b side of the main control board 61 (the lower side in FIG. 9(a)), there are provided a fifth connector mounting area 85a on which a fifth connector CN5 is mounted, which is connected to an external device, a test firing test device (not shown), in a test firing test performed before the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, a sixth connector mounting area 86a on which a sixth connector CN6 is mounted, which is connected to various display units (specifically, the first special chart display unit 37a, the second special chart display unit 37b, the normal chart display unit 38a, and the round display unit 39), and a seventh connector mounting area 87a on which a seventh connector CN7 is mounted, which is connected to the sound and light emission control device 70.

In addition to the connector group mounting area 88 and the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a, the main control board 61 is provided with an element mounting area 89 on which a large number of surface mounted components such as resistors 91, capacitors 92, transistors 93, and ICs 94 are mounted. Although not shown, wiring patterns for electrically connecting the connectors CN1 to CN4 to the various elements 91 to 94, and wiring patterns for electrically connecting the various elements 91 to 94 to each other are formed on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. These wiring patterns are made of copper and are covered with an insulating resist so that they are not exposed on the surface. Note that these wiring patterns are not limited to being made of copper as long as they are conductive, and may be made of other metals such as gold.

Next, the configuration of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a plan view of the first connector CN1, FIG. 10(b) is a plan view of the second connector CN2, FIG. 10(c) is a plan view of the third connector CN3, and FIG. 10(d) is a plan view of the fourth connector CN4. Also, FIG. 11(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, FIG. 11(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2, FIG. 12(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3, and FIG. 12(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are female connectors to which corresponding male connectors (not shown) are connected. As shown in Figures 10(a) to (d), 11(a) and (b), and 12(a) and (b), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are provided with resin housings 101 to 104 formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular parallelepiped shape, and terminals 111 to 116 which are metal bent pieces formed into an L-shape. The housings 101 to 104 are electrically insulating, and the terminals 111 to 116 are conductive.

As shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(d), the first to fourth housings 101 to 104 include rectangular bottom plate portions 101a to 104a, and upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b, lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c, left upright wall portions 101d to 104d and right upright wall portions 101e to 104e which are integrally formed by vertically standing the upper edge portions, lower edge portions, left edge portions and right edge portions of the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a from the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a. In the first to fourth housings 101 to 104, the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a and the upright wall portions 101b to 104b, 101c to 104c, 101d to 104d, and 101e to 104e form receiving portions 101f to 104f that can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. As shown in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the receiving portions 101f to 104f are open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces (to the right in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b)). The housings 101 to 104 are generally rectangular box-shaped and open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces.

The bottom plate portions 101a to 104a are formed with insertion holes 101g to 104g through which the terminals 111 to 116 are inserted. One end of each of the L-shaped terminals 111 to 116 is a contact portion 111a to 116a that electrically contacts a terminal (not shown) of a male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and the other end of the L is a fixing portion 111b to 116b for fixing the terminals 111 to 116 to the main control board 61.

The contact portions 111a to 116a extend vertically from the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a to positions near the free ends of the receiving portions 101f to 104f. The fixing portions 111b to 116b are located between the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a and the main control board 61, and have a predetermined length dimension (specifically, a length dimension of approximately 2 mm).

The fixed portions 111b to 116b are fixed to the main control board 61 by being soldered almost entirely to metal (specifically copper) lands 98 provided on the element mounting surface 61e. This electrically connects the terminals 111 to 116 to the wiring pattern (not shown) formed on the element mounting surface 61e. The fixed portions 111b to 116b are soldered using a surface mounting technique such as reflow soldering.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the first connector CN1 has 17 one-end terminals 111 whose contact portions 111a are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 111a is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector CN1 as the arrangement direction, and 17 other-end terminals 112 whose contact portions 112a are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 112a is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector CN1 as the arrangement direction. The row of one-end terminals 111 and the row of other-end terminals 112 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the short side direction of the first connector CN1 (specifically, an interval where the distance between the centers of the contact portions 111a, 112a is 2.54 mm), with the row of one-end terminals 111 arranged on one end side in the short side direction (the lower standing wall portion 101c side) and the row of other-end terminals 112 arranged on the other end side in the short side direction (the upper standing wall portion 101b side).

11(a), the fixing portion 111b of the one-end terminal 111 extends downward (in the first direction D1) from a position lower than the center in the short side direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the lower standing wall portion 101c), and extends so as to straddle between the lower standing wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 described later along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the first direction D1 is the direction from the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b toward the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c in the short side direction of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the fixed portion 112b of the other end terminal 112 extends upward (in a second direction D2 opposite to the first direction D1) from a position above the center in the short direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b), and extends so as to straddle the area between the upper standing wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156 described below along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the second connector CN2 has two terminals 113 arranged in the center of the second connector CN2 in the short side direction. These two terminals 113 are arranged in the long side direction of the second connector CN2 with a predetermined distance between them (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the centers of the contact portions 113a is 2.54 mm). As shown in FIG. 11(b), the fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 extend downward (in the first direction D1) from the center position in the short side direction of the second housing 102, and extend between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 described later along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the third connector CN3 has two terminals 114 arranged in the center of the third connector CN3 in the short side direction. These two terminals 114 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction of the third connector CN3 (specifically, an interval where the distance between the centers of the contact parts 114a is 2.54 mm). As shown in FIG. 12(a), the fixing parts 114b of these two terminals 114 extend downward (in the first direction D1) from the center position in the short side direction of the third housing 103, and extend between the lower upright wall part 103c and the lower peripheral part 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 described later along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 10 (d), the fourth connector CN4 has ten one-end terminals 115 whose contact portions 115a are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 115a is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector CN4 being the arrangement direction, and ten other-end terminals 116 whose contact portions 116a are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 116a is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction being the arrangement direction. The row of one-end terminals 115 and the row of other-end terminals 116 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the short side direction of the fourth connector CN4 (specifically, an interval where the distance between the centers of the contact portions 115a, 116a is 2.54 mm), with the row of one-end terminals 115 arranged at one end side of the short side direction (the end side of the first direction D1 in FIG. 10(d)), and the row of other-end terminals 116 arranged at the other end side of the short side direction (the end side of the second direction D2 in FIG. 10(d)).

12(b), the fixing portion 115b of the one-end terminal 115 extends downward (in the first direction D1) from a position lower than the center in the short side direction of the fourth housing 104 (near the lower standing wall portion 104c) and extends so as to straddle the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 described later along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. On the other hand, the fixing portion 116b of the other-end terminal 116 extends upward (in the second direction D2) from a position higher than the center in the short side direction of the fourth housing 104 (near the upper standing wall portion 104b) and extends so as to straddle the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 described later along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As already explained, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 in a row along one long side 61a of the main control board 61. As shown in Figures 9(a) and 9(b), when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88, the fixed parts 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 extend in the first direction D1 (downward in Figure 9(b)). In addition, the fixed parts 112b, 116b of the other end terminals 112, 116 of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4 extend in the second direction D2 (upward in Figure 9(b)), which is opposite to the first direction D1. In addition, as long as the fixed portions 111b, 113b, 114b, 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 extend in the same direction, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are not limited to being arranged in a single row on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, and may be arranged in two or more rows.

As shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(d), the lower upright walls 101c to 104c are integrally formed with locking receiving portions 101h to 104h that prevent the male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from coming loose and maintain the connected state when the male connectors are connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided near the center of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are formed over a predetermined range on the rising end side (free end side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are not present on the base end side (bottom plate portions 101a to 104a side) of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h protrude downward by approximately 1 mm from the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. The male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have locking protrusions (not shown) that engage with the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h when they are inserted into the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and a release operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. When the release operation piece is operated, the locking protrusions are displaced in a direction away from the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h, and the engagement between the locking protrusions and the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h is released. This makes it possible to pull the male connectors out of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in Figures 8(b) to 8(d), the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7, like the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, have fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a made of resin and formed into a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape, and terminals 95b to 97b, which are bent metal pieces formed into an L-shape.

The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are female connectors, and corresponding male connectors (not shown) are connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a, like the first to fourth housings 101 to 104 described above, have bottom plate portions 95c to 97c, upper upright wall portions 95d to 97d, lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e, left upright wall portions 95f to 97f, and right upright wall portions 95g to 97g, and the bottom plate portions 95c to 97c and upright wall portions 95d to 97d, 95e to 97e, 95f to 97f, and 95g to 97g form receiving portions 95h to 97h that can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The receiving sections 95h to 97h are open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces. The housings 95a to 97a are generally rectangular box-shaped and open in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces.

The lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e are integrally formed with locking receiving portions 95j to 97j to prevent the male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 from coming off and maintain the connected state when the male connectors are connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are provided near the center in the longitudinal direction of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are formed over a predetermined range on the upright end side of the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are not present on the base end side (bottom plate portions 95c to 97c side) of the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. The locking receiving portions 95j-97j protrude downward from the lower upright walls 95e-97e by approximately 1 mm.

The male connectors corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 have locking protrusions (not shown) that engage with the locking receivers 95j to 97j when they are inserted into the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 and connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7, and a release operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. When the release operation piece is operated, the locking protrusion is displaced in a direction away from the locking receivers 95j to 97j, and the engagement between the locking protrusion and the locking receivers 95j to 97j is released. This makes it possible to pull the male connectors out of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7.

Next, the configuration of the board box 62 that houses the main control board 61 will be described. Figure 13 is an oblique view of the main control device 60 as viewed from the front side, Figure 14 is an exploded oblique view of the main control device 60 as viewed from the front side, and Figure 15 is an exploded oblique view of the main control device 60 as viewed from the rear side. Note that Figures 14 and 15 omit illustration of electronic components such as the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted on the main control board 61.

As shown in Figures 13 to 15, the board box 62 includes a front case body 121 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (Figure 14) of the main control board 61, and a back case body 122 that covers the board back surface 61f (Figure 15), which is the plate surface opposite the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The front case body 121 and the back case body 122 are formed from colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. This makes it possible to visually confirm the element mounting surface 61e and the board back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 62 from the outside of the board box 62. Note that the material forming the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, but may be transparent acrylic resin, or may even be colored and transparent.

Figure 16(a) is a front view of the front case body 121, and Figure 16(b) is a front view of the rear case body 122. As shown in Figures 14 and 16(b), the rear case body 122 has a rear facing plate portion 123 formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and approximately plate-like, facing the board back surface 61f (Figure 15) of the main control board 61. The rear facing plate portion 123 has a board facing surface 123a facing the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 124 and 125 are integrally formed on the rear facing plate portion 123, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 123a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. In addition, the rear facing plate portion 123 has an upper and lower portion on the left short side of the board facing surface 123a protruding toward the main control board 61 side to form a left first partition wall 126 and a left second partition wall 127, and an upper and lower portion on the right short side of the board facing surface 123a protruding toward the main control board 61 side to form a right first partition wall 128 and a right second partition wall 129.

The upper partition wall 124 and the lower partition wall 125 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The first left partition wall 126 and the second left partition wall 127 face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction, and the first right partition wall 128 and the second right partition wall 129 face each other at a predetermined interval. The rear case body 122 is provided with a rear storage section 131 that can store a part of the rear side of the front case body 121 by means of the rear opposing plate portion 123 and these partition walls 124 to 129.

Cylindrical board fixing bosses 132-135 used to fix the main control board 61 to the rear case body 122 are integrally formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the board facing surface 123a of the rear facing plate portion 123. The board fixing bosses 132-135 protrude from the board facing surface 123a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes 132a-135a (FIG. 16(b)) that allow the main control board 61 to be screwed are formed at the free ends of the board fixing bosses 132-135. In addition, board fixing through holes 136-139 that allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the board fixing bosses 132-135 are formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the main control board 61 when viewed from the front. These four board fixing through holes 136-139 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four board fixing bosses 132-135 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the rear case body 122 by being screwed from the element mounting surface 61e side to the board fixing bosses 132-135. This results in the main control board 61 being integrated into the rear case body 122. In this state, the board rear surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 123a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-rear direction).

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 16(a), the front case body 121 has a horizontally long rectangular front side facing plate portion 141 that faces the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, sandwiching the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in FIG. 15, the front side facing plate portion 141 has an element facing surface 141a that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14). The front side facing plate portion 141 is integrally formed with a pair of upper and lower upright walls 142 and 143 by raising the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 141a toward the rear side (rear case body 122 side), and a pair of left and right upright walls 144 and 145 by raising the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 141a toward the rear side (rear case body 122 side). The upper and lower standing walls 142 and 143 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left and right standing walls 144 and 145 face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. The front case body 121 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped board housing section 146 that is open to the rear side by the front facing plate section 141 and the standing walls 142 to 145, and is capable of housing the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 16(a), a connector group corresponding recess 155 for exposing the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9(b)) on the surface of the main control device 60 is formed in the front side facing plate portion 141 at a position facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 14, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the connector group corresponding recess 155 has a horizontally long rectangular connector group corresponding plate portion 155a at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 155 that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 9(a)) of the main control board 61. The connector group corresponding plate portion 155a covers substantially the entire connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 9(a)) on which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9(a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the connector group corresponding plate 155a faces the element mounting surface 61e at a predetermined distance (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm) in the front-to-rear direction (left-to-right direction in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b)), and between the main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate 155a are the fixing portions 111b-116b of the terminals 111-116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. There is some play between these fixing portions 111b-116b and the connector group corresponding plate 155a.

As shown in Figs. 8(a) to 8(d) and 16(a), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a has a first connector insertion hole 156, a second connector insertion hole 157, a third connector insertion hole 158, and a fourth connector insertion hole 159 formed through the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the plate thickness direction, through which the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4 are inserted. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. By inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, they are exposed on the surface of the main control device 60, and can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 156a-159a to the lower peripheral portion 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b to the lower end of the locking receiving portion 101h-104h in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is approximately 2 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b to the lower end of the lower standing wall portion 101c-104c in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Therefore, when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, a total play of approximately 2 mm is created between the upper upright walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheries 156a to 159a of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheries 156b to 159b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 16(a), the fifth connector corresponding recess 161, the sixth connector corresponding recess 162, and the seventh connector corresponding recess 163 for exposing the fifth connector CN5, the sixth connector CN6, and the seventh connector CN7 on the surface of the main control device 60 are formed in the front facing plate portion 141 at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, these fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 are formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. The fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 include the fifth connector corresponding plate portion 161a, the sixth connector corresponding plate portion 162a, and the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a, which are horizontally elongated rectangular and face the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 at the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to 8(d) and 16(a), the fifth connector corresponding plate portion 161a is formed with a fifth connector insertion hole 164 through which the fifth connector CN5 is inserted, penetrating the fifth connector corresponding plate portion 161a in the plate thickness direction, the sixth connector corresponding plate portion 162a is formed with a sixth connector insertion hole 165 through which the sixth connector CN6 is inserted, penetrating the sixth connector corresponding plate portion 162a in the plate thickness direction, and the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a is formed with a seventh connector insertion hole 166 through which the seventh connector CN7 is inserted, penetrating the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a in the plate thickness direction. These fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are horizontally elongated rectangular through holes. The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed on the surface of the main control device 60 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, and are capable of receiving male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7.

As shown in Figures 8(b) to 8(d), the vertical dimension of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 is set to be approximately 2 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 95d to 97d to the lower end of the locking receiving portion 95j to 97j in the corresponding fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. Therefore, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166. The vertical dimension of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 is approximately 3 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 95d to 97d to the lower end of the lower standing wall portion 101c to 104c in the corresponding fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. Therefore, when the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, a total play of approximately 3 mm is created between the upper upright wall portions 95d to 97d and the upper peripheral portions 164a to 166a of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166, and between the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e and the lower peripheral portions 164b to 166b of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166.

As described above, the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 are formed to be slightly larger than the corresponding connectors CN1-CN7. This makes it easier to insert the first to seventh connectors CN1-CN7 into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 during the process of assembling the main control device 60.

Next, the configuration for assembling the main control device 60 will be described. In the process of assembling the main control device 60, as already described, the main control board 61 is fixed to the rear case body 122 with screws. After that, the front case body 121 is combined with the rear case body 122 so as to cover the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figures 15 and 16(a), the front facing plate portion 141 has integrally formed position adjustment bosses 171-174 at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the element facing surface 141a, which are used for position adjustment when combining the front case body 121 with the rear case body 122 with which the main control board 61 is integrated. As shown in Figure 15, the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 141a in the direction toward the main control board 61. At the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the main control board 61, boss insertion holes 175-178 are formed to allow the position adjustment bosses 171-174 to be inserted.

In the process of assembling the main control device 60, after the main control board 61 is fixed to the rear case body 122 with screws, the free ends of the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 corresponding to the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 of the main control board 61 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 of the main control board 61. The front case body 121 is then slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. As a result, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 penetrate the main control board 61 and protrude toward the rear case body 122. As already explained, when the main control board 61 is fixed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135 with screws, a predetermined gap is provided between the main control board 61 and the rear facing plate portion 123. Therefore, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 can be protruded toward the rear facing plate portion 123 side more than the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the horizontal dimensions of the boss insertion holes 175-178 are set slightly larger than the diameters of the position adjustment bosses 171-174 so that the horizontal movement of the front case body 121 is restricted when the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175-178. The boss insertion holes 175-178 are elongated holes that extend vertically along the short sides 61c, 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimensions of the boss insertion holes 175-178 are set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameters of the position adjustment bosses 171-174 so that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm up and down when the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175-178.

17(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 taken along a cutting plane (line E-E in FIG. 8(a)) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the upper partition wall 124 of the rear case body 122 is integrally formed with a first guide portion 181 that guides downward the front case body 121 that is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171-174. The first guide portion 181 is provided on the opposite side of the upper partition wall 124 from the rear facing plate portion 123, and protrudes downward from the lower flat surface of the upper partition wall 124. As already described, the upper standing wall 142 of the front case body 121 stands from the front facing plate portion 141 toward the rear case body 122. The upper standing wall 142 is integrally formed with an upper outer edge portion 151 with the end of the standing wall protruding upward.

17(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of the first guide portion 181. As shown in FIG. 17(b), the first guide portion 181 has a first guide surface 181a that contacts the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 that slides toward the rear facing plate portion 123 to gradually guide the front case body 121 downward, and a second guide surface 181b that maintains the front case body 121 guided downward. The first guide surface 181a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (the rear facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided downward by about 1 mm by the first guide surface 181a. The second guide surface 181b is a horizontal surface that exists about 1 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124. While the upper outer edge 151 of the front case body 121 is in contact with the second guide surface 181b, it is maintained in a state where it is guided approximately 2 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the lower partition wall 125 of the rear case body 122 is integrally formed with a second guide portion 182 that guides the front case body 121 upward as it slides toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171-174. The second guide portion 182 is provided closer to the rear facing plate portion 123 than the first guide portion 181 in order to guide the front case body 121 upward in a state where it is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, and protrudes upward from the upper flat surface of the lower partition wall 125. As already described, the lower standing wall 143 stands from the front facing plate portion 141 toward the rear case body 122. The lower standing wall 143 is integrally formed with a lower outer edge portion 152 with the end of the standing wall protruding downward.

17(c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of the second guide portion 182. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the second guide portion 182 has a first guide surface 182a that contacts the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 that slides toward the rear facing plate portion 123 to gradually guide the front case body 121 upward, and a second guide surface 182b that maintains the front case body 121 guided upward so that the front case body 121 can be fixed to the rear case body 122 while the front case body 121 is guided upward. The first guide surface 182a is an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the rear (the rear facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided upward by about 1 mm by the first guide surface 182a. The second guide surface 182b is a horizontal surface that exists about 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125. While the lower outer edge 152 of the front case body 121 is in contact with the second guide surface 182b, it is maintained in a state where it is guided approximately 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125.

The second guide portion 182 is provided at a position where it comes into contact with the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 after the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 is no longer in contact with the first guide portion 181. Therefore, after the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, it is no longer in contact with either the first guide portion 181 or the second guide portion 182, and is then guided upward by the second guide portion 182.

The process flow for assembling and fixing the front case body 121 to the rear case body 122 with which the main control board 61 is integrated will now be described with reference to Figures 17(a) to 17(c), 18(a) and 18(b). Figures 18(a) and 18(b) are longitudinal cross-sectional views of the main control unit 60 taken along a cutting plane (line E-E in Figure 8(a)) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6 during the process of assembling the main control unit 60.

As shown in Figure 18 (a), when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (Figure 15) are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (Figure 15), the front case body 121 can be slid toward the rear opposing plate portion 123, whereby the front case body 121 can be combined with the rear case body 122 into which the main control board 61 is integrated, while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. In the process of sliding the front case body 121 toward the rear facing plate portion 123, the upper standing wall 142, the upper outer edge portion 151, the lower standing wall 143, the lower outer edge portion 152, the left standing wall 144 (FIG. 15), and the right standing wall 145 (FIG. 15) of the front case body 121 enter between the main control board 61 and the upper partition wall 124, the lower partition wall 125, the left first partition wall 126 (FIG. 14), the left second partition wall 127 (FIG. 14), the right first partition wall 128 (FIG. 14), and the right second partition wall 129 (FIG. 14) of the rear case body 122. Then, the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the first guide portion 181 provided on the upper partition wall 124 of the rear case body 122.

Then, the front case body 121 is gradually guided downward along the first guide surface 181a of the first guide portion 181, and is maintained in this downward guided state by the second guide surface 181b. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 175-178 are formed as elongated holes extending in the short direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175-178, it is possible to guide the front case body 121 downward by the first guide portion 181 within the range allowed by the shape of the boss insertion holes 175-178 while restricting the lateral movement of the front case body 121.

As the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, the position of the main control board 61 relative to the front case body 121 moves upward, and the positions of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) relative to the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 (FIG. 8(a)) move upward. As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) are positioned in the vertical center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 (FIG. 8(a)).

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b (FIG. 17(b)) of the first guide portion 181, if the front case body 121 is further slid toward the rear opposing plate portion 123, the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b and the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) are positioned in the vertical center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (FIG. 8(a)), and a portion of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166.

In this state, the dimension of the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159, and the dimension of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159, is approximately 1 mm. In addition, the dimension of the play between the upper upright wall portions 95d-97d of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 and the upper peripheral portions 164a-166a of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164-166, and the dimension of the play between the lower upright wall portions 95e-97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 and the lower peripheral portions 164b-166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164-166 are approximately 1.5 mm.

In this way, the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175-178, which are long holes extending in the short direction of the main control board 61, to restrict the lateral movement of the front case body 121, and the vertical position of the front case body 121 is adjusted by the first guide portion 181, so that the first to seventh connectors CN1-CN7 are positioned in the vertical center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166, and the first to seventh connectors CN1-CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 in this state.

In a configuration that does not include the position adjustment bosses 171-174 and the boss insertion holes 175-178, the position of the front case body 121 relative to the main control board 61 must be appropriately adjusted in order to insert the seven connectors CN1-CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166, which reduces the efficiency of the work of assembling the front case body 121 to the rear case body 122 integrated with the main control board 61. In contrast, in this embodiment, after the four position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the corresponding four boss insertion holes 175-178, the front case body 121 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171-174, and the seven connectors CN1-CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 without the need to finely adjust the position of the front case body 121 relative to the main control board 61. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 while the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are positioned in the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction, thereby preventing the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (Figures 10(a) to 10(d)) and the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j (Figures 8(b) to 8(d)) of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 from colliding with the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b, 164b to 166b of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (Figures 8(a) to 8(d)). This simplifies the process of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the seven corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 during the process of assembling the main control unit 60, improving the efficiency of the process.

After the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, as shown in Figures 17(a) to 17(c), when the front case body 121 is further slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123, the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the second guide portion 182 provided on the lower partition wall 125 of the rear case body 122. The front case body 121 slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 is gradually guided upward along the first guide surface 182a of the second guide portion 182, and is maintained in this upward guided state by the second guide surface 182b. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed as elongated holes extending in the short direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175-178, it is possible to guide the front case body 121 upward by the second guide portion 182 within the range allowed by the shape of the boss insertion holes 175-178 while restricting the lateral movement of the front case body 121.

When the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182, the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 are in close proximity to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4, as shown in Figures 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b). The dimension of the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is smaller than the dimension of the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. Details of the lower play will be explained later.

As already explained, when a portion of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166, the dimension of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 95e-97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 and the lower peripheral portions 164b-166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164-166 is larger than the dimension of the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. Therefore, when the front case body 121 moves upward while being guided by the second guide portion 182, the lower upright wall portions 95e-97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 do not come into contact with the lower peripheral portions 164b-166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164-166, preventing the upward movement of the front case body 121. This makes it possible to rely on the guidance of the second guide portion 182 to bring the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 close to the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

As already explained, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are formed over a predetermined range on the rising end side (free end side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c. On the other hand, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are not present on the base end side (bottom plate portion 101a to 104a side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c, and the base end side is a smooth flat surface. As shown in Figures 11(a) and (b) and Figures 12(a) and (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a of the front case body 121 gets under the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h and approaches the smooth surface as the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182. This makes it possible for the second guide portion 182 to guide the front case body 121 upward until the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 come sufficiently close to the lower upright walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

Then, when the front case body 121 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171-174, the free ends of the position adjustment bosses 171-174 come into contact with the rear facing plate portion 123. This makes it impossible for the front case body 121 to slide any further toward the rear facing plate portion 123, and the sliding of the front case body 121 to join with the rear case body 122 is completed. The front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122 when this sliding is completed.

Next, the configuration for fixing the front case body 121 to the rear case body 122 will be described. As already described, the left side standing wall 144 and the right side standing wall 145 stand from the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the rear case body 122. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the left side standing wall 144 has a front side first case fixing boss 183 integrally formed at the end of the left side standing wall 144, and the right side standing wall 145 has a front side second case fixing boss 184 and a front side third case fixing boss 185 integrally formed at the end of the right side standing wall 145. The front side first case fixing boss 183 is provided approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the left side standing wall 144 and protrudes to the left from the left side standing wall 144. The front side second case fixing boss 184 and the front side third case fixing boss 185 are provided at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction and protrude to the right from the right side standing wall 145. These case fixing bosses 183-185 have through holes 183a-185a through which screws 179 are inserted to fix the front case body 121 to the rear case body 122.

16B, the rear facing plate portion 123 of the rear case body 122 has a rear first case fixing boss 186 integrally formed on the left short side of the rear facing plate portion 123, and a rear second case fixing boss 187 and a rear third case fixing boss 188 integrally formed on the right short side of the rear facing plate portion 123. The rear first case fixing boss 186 corresponds to the front first case fixing boss 183, the rear second case fixing boss 187 corresponds to the front second case fixing boss 184, and the rear third case fixing boss 188 corresponds to the front third case fixing boss 185. The rear first case fixing boss 186 is provided at a position between the left first partition wall 126 and the left second partition wall 127 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the rear facing plate portion 123. Additionally, the rear second case fixing boss 187 and the rear third case fixing boss 188 are provided at a predetermined interval between the right first partition wall 128 and the right second partition wall 129 in the vertical direction, and protrude to the right from the rear opposing plate portion 123. These case fixing bosses 186-188 have screw holes 186a-188a formed therein to enable the front case body 121 to be fixed with screws.

19(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole 183a formed in the front first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a formed in the rear first case fixing boss 186 before the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182, and FIG. 19(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole 183a formed in the front first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a formed in the rear first case fixing boss 186 after the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182. Before the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the through hole 183a of the front first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a of the rear first case fixing boss 186 are vertically misaligned. Although not shown in the figure, the through holes 184a, 185a (FIG. 16(a)) of the front-side second case fixing boss 184 and the front-side third case fixing boss 185 are vertically misaligned with the screw holes 187a, 188a (FIG. 16(b)) of the rear-side second case fixing boss 187 and the rear-side third case fixing boss 188. For this reason, they cannot be fixed with screws as they are.

After the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the misalignment between the through hole 183a of the front first case fixing boss 183 and the screw hole 186a of the rear first case fixing boss 186 is eliminated, and the through hole 183a and the screw hole 186a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, the through holes 184a, 185a (FIG. 16(a)) of the front second case fixing boss 184 and the front third case fixing boss 185 are in communication with the screw holes 187a, 188a (FIG. 16(b)) of the rear second case fixing boss 187 and the rear third case fixing boss 188. This makes it possible to screw the front case body 121 and the rear case body 122 together. Because the front case body 121 and the rear case body 122 cannot be fixed together with screws unless the front case body 121 is guided upward, it is possible to prevent the front case body 121 and the rear case body 122 from being fixed together when the front case body 121 has not been guided upward or when the upward guidance is only partially completed.

The front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122 by screwing the front first case fixing boss 183, the front second case fixing boss 184, and the front third case fixing boss 185 (Fig. 16(a)) to the rear first case fixing boss 186, the rear second case fixing boss 187, and the rear third case fixing boss 188 (Fig. 16(b)) from the front side of the front case body 121. This forms a square box-shaped (approximately rectangular parallelepiped) board box 62 with a predetermined internal space, and the main control board 61 is housed within the internal space of the board box 62.

When the front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122, the upper upright wall 142, upper outer edge 151, lower upright wall 143, lower outer edge 152, left upright wall 144, and right upright wall 145 of the front case body 121 are inserted between the partition walls 124-129 of the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61. The various elements 91-94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 are housed between the main control board 61 and the front case body 121, and the first to seventh connectors CN1-CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 (FIG. 8(a)) and exposed on the front side of the front case body 121. As shown in FIG. 8(a), except for the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 is covered by the front case body 121. In addition, the board back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the back side facing plate portion 123 at a predetermined distance.

Here, the details of the play that occurs around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be explained with reference to Figures 8(a) to (d), 11(a) and (b), and 12(a) and (b).

As already explained with reference to Figures 11(a) and (b) and Figures 12(a) and (b), the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b at the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 extend across the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. As already explained with reference to FIG. 11(a) and FIG. 12(b), the fixing portions 112b, 116b of the other end terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4 extend between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159, straddling the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As described above, the dimension of the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is smaller than the dimension of the upper play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent tool such as a wire into the lower play to fraudulently manipulate signals. The fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b extend between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b along the element mounting surface 61e, and can provide priority protection from such fraudulent acts to the signal lines set at the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4.

The dimension of the lower play is preferably 0.8 mm or less, and more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By making the dimension of the play on the one end side 0.8 mm or less, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire through the lower play and manipulating the signals set in the terminals 111, 113 to 115 whose fixing parts 111b, 113b to 115b extend between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral parts 156b to 159b along the element mounting surface 61e. By making the dimension of the lower play 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert a fraud tool into the lower play, and the effect of preventing the fraudulent act can be improved. Details of the signal lines assigned to the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described later.

As already explained, the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 have locking receiving portions 101h-104h formed on the lower side surfaces of the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c. As shown in Figures 11(a) and 11(b) and Figures 12(a) and 12(b), the locking receiving portions 101h-104h are located closer to the upright tip ends (free ends) of the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c than the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h can prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent tool into the lower play from the front facing plate portion 141, which is located behind the main control board 61 on the pachinko machine 10, to electrically contact the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. This makes the fraudulent act even more difficult.

When a portion of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (see FIG. 18(b)), there is a common vertical play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. For this reason, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182 with the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, variation in the play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is prevented in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. This allows the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b-159b to be uniformly close to the connector group corresponding plate 155a.

As already explained, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surface 155b of the connector group corresponding recess 155 rises approximately vertically from the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the direction opposite to the main control board 61. This makes it difficult to insert a conductive tampering tool such as a wire into the gap between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a. As already explained, the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 are formed by recessing the front side facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surfaces 161b to 163b of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 rise approximately vertically from the fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate portions 161a to 163a in the direction opposite to the main control board 61. This makes it difficult to insert a conductive tampering tool such as a wire into the gap between the fifth connector CN5 and the fifth connector corresponding plate portion 161a, the gap between the sixth connector CN6 and the sixth connector corresponding plate portion 162a, and the gap between the seventh connector CN7 and the seventh connector corresponding plate portion 163a.

Next, we will explain the sealing seal 191.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear case body 122 has a rear attachment plate portion 192 formed integrally between the rear second case fixing boss 187 and the rear third case fixing boss 188 on the right short side of the rear opposing plate portion 123. In addition, the front case body 121 has a front attachment plate portion 193 formed integrally on the right short side of the front opposing plate portion 141 at a position where the rear attachment plate portion 192 overlaps with the board box 62 in the thickness direction.

These two attachment plate parts 192, 193 have a plurality of sets of mutually communicating screw holes formed therein, and screws (not shown) are screwed into these screw holes. Note that the screws used are well-known and removable. The two attachment plate parts 192, 193 are fixed together by the screws being screwed in as described above. A seal sticker 191 is attached to the attachment plate parts 192, 193 so as to straddle the boundary between the two, as shown in FIG. 13. When the seal sticker 191 is peeled off after being attached, the adhesive layer remains on the attachment plate parts 192, 193, making it impossible to reattach it. The presence of the seal sticker 191 makes it possible to discover any unauthorized opening of the board box 62.

As shown in FIG. 13, an attachment part cover 194 is fixed to the two attachment plate parts 192, 193 (FIG. 14) so as to cover the attached seal sticker 191 from the outside. The attachment part cover 194 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the seal sticker 191 can be seen through the attachment part cover 194. The attachment part cover 194 may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, the edge of the side where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are exposed on the surface is located on the upper side, and the edge of the side where the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed on the surface is located on the lower side. Incidentally, when the gaming machine body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the installed state in the gaming hall, the back side of the gaming machine body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the back part of the gaming machine body 12, and furthermore, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the surface of the front case body 121 becomes visible by opening the gaming machine body 12 against the outer frame 11. Note that the main control device 60 may be configured so that all or part of the main control device 60 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. Even in this case, the back pack 72 is made transparent, so that the surface of the front case body 121 can be seen by opening the gaming machine main body 12 relative to the outer frame 11.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

As already explained, the main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 20, the main control board 61 is equipped with the above-mentioned MPU 63 and power failure monitoring circuit 201. In addition to the main CPU 64, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, the MPU 63 also has a main ROM 65 and a main RAM 66 built in. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 63 also has an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like built in. It is not essential that the main ROM 65 and the main RAM 66 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 63, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The main ROM 65 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 65 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 64.

The main RAM 66 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 66 allows random access, and when compared for the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 65. The main RAM 66 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 65.

The MPU 63 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring circuit 201 is connected to the input side of the MPU 63. The power failure monitoring circuit 201 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the maximum voltage of DC 36 V output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) of AC 100 V in, for example, an amusement hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the power supply/launch control device 78 generates the operating power (specifically, DC 36 V, DC 24 V, DC 12 V, and DC 5 V) required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 77, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met.

The output side of the MPU 63 is connected to the special chart unit 37, the regular chart unit 38, and the round display unit 39. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a first special chart display unit 37a, a second special chart display unit 37b, a first special chart reserved display unit 37c, and a second special chart reserved display unit 37d, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Similarly, the regular chart unit 38 is provided with a regular chart display unit 38a and a regular chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 63 controls the drive of various drive units and various display units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 63 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 32c (see FIG. 21) described later so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the open state of the normal power device 34a is selected, the MPU 63 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 34c (see FIG. 21) described later so that the normal power device 34a is opened and closed. Also, during the game round and the open/close execution mode, the MPU 63 controls the display of the special chart unit 37. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not the normal power device 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the MPU 63 controls the display of the normal chart unit 38. Also, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 63 controls the display of the round display unit 39.

The audio and light emission control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio and light emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7. Details of these various commands will be explained later. The audio and light emission control device 70 drives and controls the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on the various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 90. The display control device 90 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the commands received from the audio and light emission control device 70.

The payout control device 77 is connected to the input and output sides of the MPU 63. The payout control device 77 is equipped with a payout side MPU 221. In addition to the payout side CPU 222, which is a calculation processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the payout side MPU 221 also includes a payout side ROM 223, a payout side RAM 224, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout side ROM 223 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The payout side ROM 223 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 222.

The payout side RAM 224 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 224 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the payout side ROM 223 for the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 224 requires less time to read. The payout side RAM 224 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 223.

The payout side MPU 221 is provided with an input port and an output port. The payout side CPU 222 is capable of two-way communication with the main CPU 64. The payout control device 77 outputs various prize ball commands, such as a 1 prize ball command, a 10 prize ball command, and a 15 prize ball command, based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section (general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35). The 1 prize ball command is a command for the payout side CPU 222 to recognize that one game ball should be paid out, the 10 prize ball command is a command for the payout side CPU 222 to recognize that 10 game balls should be paid out, and the 15 prize ball command is a command for the payout side CPU 222 to recognize that 15 game balls should be paid out. The payout CPU 222 receives a prize ball command from the main CPU 64 and controls the operation of the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

The payout side CPU 222 monitors whether or not it is possible to normally pay out game balls, and when it is determined that it is not possible to normally pay out, it stops the payout device 76 even if the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout side RAM 224. The payout side CPU 222 also transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 64 indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out in this manner. When the main CPU 64 receives the payout limit command, it transmits an alert command to the sound and light-emitting control device 70 so that an alert indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls is issued by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The states in which it is not possible to normally dispense game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been refilled with game balls, an abnormal dispense state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the ball passageway leading from the payout device 76 (FIG. 2) to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. The payout side CPU 222 determines that the tank is full when the full tank detection sensor continues to detect game balls, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that the tank is full, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and sends a full tank state command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 64. When the full tank state is released, it executes a process to enable the payout of game balls and sends a full tank state release command indicating that the full tank state has been released to the main CPU 64. When the main CPU 64 receives the full tank state command, it determines that the tank is full, and when it receives the full tank state release command, it determines that the full tank state has been released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided at a midway position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 (FIG. 2) to the payout device 76 (FIG. 2), and the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. The payout side CPU 222 determines that the no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls, and determines that the no-ball state has been released when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls is released. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that the no-ball state exists, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and transmits a no-ball state command indicating that the no-ball state exists to the main CPU 64. When the no-ball state is released, it executes a process to enable the payout of game balls, and transmits a no-ball state release command indicating that the no-ball state has been released to the main CPU 64. The main CPU 64 recognizes that a no-ball state exists when it receives a no-ball state command, and recognizes that the no-ball state has been canceled when it receives a no-ball state release command.

The payout device 76 (FIG. 2) is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. The payout side CPU 222 determines that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the payout detection sensor detects a game ball. The payout side CPU 222 also determines that a payout abnormality state exists when the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is being driven and controlled so that a game ball is paid out, and determines that the payout abnormality state has been released when the state in which the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is released. When the payout side CPU 222 determines that a payout abnormality state exists, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and transmits a payout abnormality state command indicating that a payout abnormality state exists to the main CPU 64. In addition, when the abnormal payout state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a payout abnormal state release command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been released is sent to the main CPU 64. When the main CPU 64 receives the payout abnormal state command, it recognizes that there is an abnormal payout state, and when it receives the payout abnormal state release command, it recognizes that the payout abnormal state has been released.

20, a front door open sensor 225 is connected to the input side of the dispensing side MPU 221, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 225 is input to the dispensing side CPU 222. When the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2), the front door open sensor 225 raises the detection signal output to the dispensing side CPU 222 from a LOW state to a HI state, and when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state relative to the inner frame 13, the detection signal output to the dispensing side CPU 222 drops from a HI state to a LOW state. When the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is in a LOW state, the dispensing side CPU 222 determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, and when the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is in a HI state, the front door frame 14 is determined to be in an open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 222 sends a front door open command to the main side CPU 64 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and sends a front door close command to the main side CPU 64 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. These front door open commands and front door close commands are sent from the dispensing side CPU 222 to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. When the main side CPU 64 receives a front door open command, it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed to an open state, and when it receives a front door close command, it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed to a closed state.

20, a main body open sensor 226 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 221, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 226 is input to the payout side CPU 222. The main body open sensor 226 raises the detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 from a LOW state to a HI state when the gaming machine main body 12 (FIG. 2) is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11 (FIG. 1), and lowers the detection signal output to the payout side CPU 222 from a HI state to a LOW state when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11. The payout side CPU 222 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226 is in a LOW state, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226 is in a HI state. In addition, the payout CPU 222 transmits a main body open command to the main CPU 64 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main CPU 64 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. When the main CPU 64 receives a main body open command, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed to an open state, and when it receives a main body close command, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed to a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 20, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 221. The information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out. As already explained, the management computer of the game hall receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, according to the various information received, it calculates the ball payout rate (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and other information, thereby grasping the execution mode of the payout of game balls in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the electronic devices connected to the input and output sides of the MPU 63 via the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described with reference to Figures 21, 22, and 23(a) to 23(c). Figure 21 is a block diagram showing the connection between the MPU 63 and various electronic devices. Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of the terminals 111 and 112 of the first connector CN1, Figure 23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of the terminals 113 of the second connector CN2, Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of the terminals 114 of the third connector CN3, and Figure 23(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of the terminals 115 and 116 of the fourth connector CN4.

First, we will explain the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 111, 112 of the first connector CN1.

As already explained, the first connector CN1 has 17 one-end terminals 111 and 17 other-end terminals 112. The fixing portion 111b of the one-end terminals 111 extends between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, while the fixing portion 112b of the other-end terminals 112 extends between the upper upright wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As already explained, the lower play between the lower upright wall 101c of the first connector CN1 and the lower periphery 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 is smaller than the upper play between the upper upright wall 101b of the first connector CN1 and the upper periphery 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the one-end terminal 111 is protected preferentially over the other-end terminal 112 against fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire from the front-side opposing plate 141 side, which is located behind the main control board 61 on the pachinko machine 10, to fraudulently manipulate signals.

As shown in FIG. 22, the 17 one-end terminals 111 provided on the first connector CN1 are n-th terminals, where n is an odd number between 1 and 33, specifically the first terminal, the third terminal, the fifth terminal, ... the 33rd terminal. The 17 other-end terminals 112 provided on the first connector CN1 are m-th terminals, where m is an even number between 2 and 34, specifically the second terminal, the fourth terminal, the sixth terminal, ... the 34th terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 63 is electrically connected to an external terminal board 79, a dispensing control device 77, and a power supply/launch control device 78 via a first relay board PB1.

The first relay board PB1 is equipped with an eleventh connector CN11, a twenty-first connector CN21, a twenty-second connector CN22, and a twenty-third connector CN23. The eleventh connector CN11 is electrically connected to the first connector CN1, the twenty-first connector CN21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79, the twenty-second connector CN22 is electrically connected to the payout control device 77, and the twenty-third connector CN23 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device 78.

As shown in Figures 21 and 22, the first terminal to the tenth terminal of the first connector CN1 are connected to signal lines that enable the transmission of external signals from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79. The first and second terminals of the first connector CN1 are set to GND (ground). The main control board 61 and the first relay board PB1 are provided with a GND plane (not shown), and the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the first relay board PB1 are set to a common potential. The first and second terminals of the first connector CN1 are electrically connected to the GND plane of the main control board 61.

The third to tenth terminals of the first connector CN1 are connected to signal lines for transmitting external signals from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79. The external signals transmitted from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the third to tenth terminals include a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a signal indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, a signal indicating that one game round has ended, a signal indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100 balls) of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34.

Wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and the dispensing control device 77 is connected to the 11th to 17th terminals and the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1. Signal lines for enabling serial communication between the main CPU 64 and the dispensing CPU 222 are connected to the 11th to 13th terminals of the first connector CN1. The serial communication is an asynchronous communication (start-stop synchronous communication) in which data is sent and received at a predetermined communication speed without clock exchange between the sending and receiving sides, and is full-duplex communication in which a transmission path for sending and a transmission path for receiving are provided. Note that a configuration may be used in which half-duplex communication is performed between the main CPU 64 and the dispensing control device 77, in which data is sent and received while switching between sending and receiving using one transmission path, or a configuration may be used in which synchronous communication is performed in which clock exchange is performed between the sending and receiving sides. A configuration may also be used in which parallel communication is performed between the main CPU 64 and the dispensing control device 77.

The 11th terminal is connected to a signal line that serves as a transmission path for the main CPU 64 to receive various payout reception commands from the payout CPU 222. The 12th terminal is set to GND (ground), and is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. The 13th terminal is connected to a signal line that serves as a transmission path for the main CPU 64 to send various payout transmission signals to the payout CPU 222.

The payout reception commands include the above-mentioned payout restriction command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body close command, full tank state command, full tank release command, no ball state command, no ball state release command, payout abnormal state command, and payout abnormal state release command. The 11th terminal at which the main CPU 64 receives various payout reception commands is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the payout reception command signal line, it is possible to prevent the front door close command, main body close command, full tank state release command, no ball state release command, or payout abnormal state release command from being fraudulently sent to the open state of the front door frame 14, the open state of the gaming machine main body 12, the full tank state, the no ball state, or the payout abnormal state from being fraudulently released.

The payout transmission command includes the various prize ball commands already explained (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command). The 13th terminal at which the main CPU 64 receives the various payout transmission commands is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the payout transmission command, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent payout of game balls by sending fraudulent signals to the signal line.

The 14th terminal is set to GND (ground), and the 14th terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. The 15th terminal is set to a payout reset signal. The payout reset signal is a signal for causing the payout CPU 222 to execute processing corresponding to a power interruption when the main CPU 64 identifies the occurrence of a power interruption. The main CPU 64 monitors the power interruption signal received from the power interruption monitoring circuit 201, and when it identifies the occurrence of a power interruption, it drops the payout reset signal from a HI state to a LOW state. When the payout CPU 222 detects the falling edge of the payout reset signal, it executes processing to initialize the payout RAM 224. When the payout RAM 224 is initialized, the information stored in the payout RAM 224 is cleared.

The 15th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the payout reset signal is the one-end terminal 111, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud tool in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the payout reset signal line, it is possible to prevent the payout RAM 224 from being fraudulently reset by sending a fraudulent signal to the signal line. As already explained, the payout CPU 222 transmits information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out to the management computer of the game hall via the external terminal board 79. By preventing the payout RAM 224 from being fraudulently reset, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the transmission of the information is fraudulently blocked and the number of game balls that have been paid out cannot be accurately grasped by the management computer. In addition, by preventing the payout RAM 224 from being fraudulently reset, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the payout RAM 224 about the full tank state, no ball state, or abnormal payout state from being fraudulently cleared.

A signal line is connected to the 16th terminal of the first connector CN1, through which the main CPU 64 receives a launch status signal from the power supply and launch control device 78, and a signal line is connected to the 17th terminal, through which the main CPU 64 transmits a launch permission signal to the power supply and launch control device 78. The main CPU 64 transmits a launch permission signal to the power supply and launch control device 78 on the condition that it has received a launch status signal from the power supply and launch control device 78. The launch status signal is a signal indicating that a launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28, and the launch permission signal is a signal for causing the power supply and launch control device 78 to execute a process to launch a game ball. By receiving the launch status signal from the power supply and launch control device 78, the main CPU 64 recognizes that a launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28, and executes a launch control process. In the launch control process, in a situation in which a launch operation is continuing on the launch operation device 28, a launch permission signal is transmitted at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 seconds.

The 17th terminal from which the main CPU 64 transmits the launch permission signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from tampering using conductive tampering tools in the first connector CN1. By preventing tampering with the signal line of the launch permission signal, it is possible to prevent the launch of game balls at a period shorter than the specified launch period (specifically, a period of 0.6 seconds) that would be caused by sending an illegal signal to the signal line.

A signal line is connected to the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1, through which the main CPU 64 receives a prize ball permission signal from the payout CPU 222. The prize ball permission signal is a signal indicating whether or not it is possible to send a prize ball command (one prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, or 15 prize ball command) from the main CPU 64 to the payout CPU 222. When the prize ball permission signal is in a HI state, it is possible to send a prize ball command, and when the prize ball permission signal is in a LOW state, it is not possible to send a prize ball command. The prize ball permission signal is set to a HI state when the value of the unpaid counter provided in the payout RAM 224 is "0", and is set to a LOW state when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more. The unpaid counter is a counter for the payout CPU 222 to grasp the number of unpaid game balls.

The 19th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the prize ball permission signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the prize ball permission signal, it is possible to prevent the creation of a situation in which a prize ball command is fraudulently sent from the main CPU 64 to the payout CPU 222 even if the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout RAM 224 is not "0" due to fraudulent acts of sending fraudulent signals to the signal line.

Signal lines are connected to the 18th terminal and the 20th to 34th terminals of the first connector CN1 to electrically connect the power supply and launch control device 78 to the main control device 60. Wiring is connected to the 18th and 20th terminals to supply a DC 5V element drive voltage.

A signal line is connected to the 21st terminal, which allows the main CPU 64 to receive a RAM erase signal from the power supply and launch control device 78. The power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a RAM erase switch that is operated to initialize the data stored in the main RAM 66 when the power is turned on, for example, when the amusement hall opens for business. The RAM erase signal is a signal that is sent from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the main CPU 64 when the RAM erase switch is pressed.

The 21st terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the RAM erase signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from tampering using conductive tampering tools in the first connector CN1. By preventing tampering with the signal line of the RAM erase signal, it is possible to prevent data stored in the main RAM 66 from being tampered with by sending an unauthorized signal to that signal line.

GND (ground) is set to terminals 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 33, and 34. These terminals are electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line for supplying a backup power supply voltage (VBB) is connected to the 23rd terminal. Wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC 12V is connected to the 25th and 27th terminals, a signal line for supplying a power supply voltage of DC 24V is connected to the 29th terminal, and electrical wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC 36V is connected to the 31st and 32nd terminals.

Next, we will explain the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 113 of the second connector CN2.

As already explained, the second connector CN2 has two terminals 113. The fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 extend between the lower standing wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 so as to straddle along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As already explained, the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portion 102c of the second connector CN2 and the lower peripheral portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 is smaller than the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portion 102b of the second connector CN2 and the upper peripheral portion 157a of the second connector insertion hole 157. For this reason, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13, the terminal 113 is given priority in protection against fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into the front facing plate portion 141, which is located behind the main control board 61 on the pachinko machine 10, to fraudulently manipulate the signals.

As shown in FIG. 21, the first operating port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the second connector CN2 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. The second relay board PB2 is mounted with the twelfth connector CN12 and the 24th connector CN24. The twelfth connector CN12 is electrically connected to the second connector CN2, and the 24th connector CN24 is electrically connected to the first operating port detection sensor 46a.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(a), the first terminal and the second terminal, which are terminals 113 of the second connector CN2, are connected to wiring for electrically connecting the main CPU 64 and the first actuation port detection sensor 46a.

The first terminal of the second connector CN2 is set to GND (ground). The second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown) like the first relay board PB1 described above, and is set so that the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the second relay board PB2 are based on a common potential. The first terminal of the second connector CN2 is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A wiring is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2 so that the main CPU 64 can receive a detection signal from the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. The first actuation port detection sensor 46a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and is provided with a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, an OUT terminal for outputting the detection signal, and a GND terminal for a reference potential. The VDD terminal is supplied with an operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) from the fourth connector CN4, the details of which will be described later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 24th connector CN24. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are kept at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and is in a HIGH state when a game ball is detected.

As already explained, all terminals 113 (first terminal and second terminal) of the second connector CN2 are given priority protection from fraudulent acts using conductive fraudulent tools. By giving priority protection to the signal line of the detection signal of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a from fraudulent acts, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed to send fraudulent signals to that signal line, thereby preventing the fraudulent creation of a situation in which a game ball has entered the first actuation port 33.

Next, we will explain the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 114 of the third connector CN3.

As already explained, the third connector CN3 has two terminals 114. The fixing portions 114b of these two terminals 114 extend between the lower standing wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 so as to straddle along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As already explained, the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portion 103c of the third connector CN3 and the lower peripheral portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 is smaller than the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portion 103b of the third connector CN3 and the upper peripheral portion 158a of the third connector insertion hole 158. For this reason, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13, the terminals 114 are given priority in protection against fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into the front facing plate portion 141, which is located behind the main control board 61 on the pachinko machine 10, to fraudulently manipulate the signals.

As shown in FIG. 21, the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to the third connector CN3 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. The second relay board PB2 is equipped with the thirteenth connector CN13 and the twenty-fifth connector CN25. The thirteenth connector CN13 is electrically connected to the third connector CN3, and the twenty-fifth connector CN25 is electrically connected to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23 (b), the first and second terminals 114 of the third connector CN3 are connected to wiring for electrically connecting the main CPU 64 and the second actuation port detection sensor 47a.

The first terminal of the third connector CN3 is set to GND (ground). The second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown) like the first relay board PB1 described above, and is set so that the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the second relay board PB2 are based on a common potential. The first terminal of the third connector CN3 is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line is connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3 so that the main CPU 64 can receive the detection signal of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. The second actuation port detection sensor 47a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and is provided with a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, an OUT terminal for outputting the detection signal, and a GND terminal for the reference potential. The VDD terminal is supplied with the operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) from the fourth connector CN4, the details of which will be described later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 25th connector CN25. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are kept at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and is in a HIGH state when a game ball is detected.

As already explained, all terminals 114 (first terminal and second terminal) of the third connector CN3 are given priority protection from fraudulent acts using conductive fraudulent tools. By giving priority protection to the signal line of the detection signal of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a from fraudulent acts, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed to send fraudulent signals to that signal line, thereby preventing a situation in which a game ball has entered the second actuation port 34.

Next, we will explain the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 115, 116 of the fourth connector CN4.

As already explained, the fourth connector CN4 has ten one-end terminals 115 and ten other-end terminals 116. The fixing portion 115b of the one-end terminals 115 extends between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, while the fixing portion 116b of the other-end terminals 116 extends between the upper upright wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. As already explained, the lower play between the lower upright wall 104c of the fourth connector CN4 and the lower periphery 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 is smaller than the upper play between the upper upright wall 104b of the fourth connector CN4 and the upper periphery 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the one-end terminal 115 is protected preferentially over the other-end terminal 116 against fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire from the front facing plate 141 side, which is located behind the main control board 61 on the pachinko machine 10, to fraudulently manipulate signals.

As shown in FIG. 23(c), the ten one-end terminals 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are p-th terminals, where p is an odd number between 1 and 19, specifically the first terminal, the third terminal, the fifth terminal, ... the 19th terminal. The ten other-end terminals 116 of the fourth connector CN4 are q-th terminals, where q is an even number between 2 and 20, specifically the second terminal, the fourth terminal, the sixth terminal, ... the 20th terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the fourth connector CN4 of the main control board 61 is electrically connected to the first winning port detection sensor 42a to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, the special power detection sensor 45a, the outlet detection sensor 48a, the gate detection sensor 49a, the radio wave detection sensor 202 for detecting illegal radio waves, the magnetic detection sensor 203 for detecting illegal magnetism, the special power open detection sensor 32b for detecting the open state of the special power winning device 32, the normal power open detection sensor 34b for detecting the open state of the normal power role 34a, the special power drive unit 32c for switching the special power winning device 32 to an open state or a closed state in response to the received drive signal, and the normal power drive unit 34c for switching the normal power role 34a to an open state or a closed state in response to the received drive signal. The second relay board PB2 is equipped with the 14th connector CN14 and the 26th to 37th connectors CN26 to CN37. The 14th connector CN14 is electrically connected to the 4th connector CN4. The 26th connector CN26 is electrically connected to the 1st winning opening detection sensor 42a, the 27th connector CN27 is electrically connected to the 2nd winning opening detection sensor 43a, the 28th connector CN28 is electrically connected to the 3rd winning opening detection sensor 44a, the 29th connector CN29 is electrically connected to the special power detection sensor 45a, the 30th connector CN30 is electrically connected to the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 31st connector CN31 is electrically connected to the gate detection sensor 49a. The 32nd connector CN32 is electrically connected to the radio wave detection sensor 202, the 33rd connector CN33 is electrically connected to the magnetic detection sensor 203, the 34th connector CN34 is electrically connected to the special power open detection sensor 32b, the 35th connector CN35 is electrically connected to the normal power open detection sensor 34b, the 36th connector CN36 is electrically connected to the special power drive unit 32c, and the 37th connector CN37 is electrically connected to the normal power drive unit 34c.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(c), the first terminal of the fourth connector CN4 is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the third terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the fourth terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the outlet detection sensor 48a, the fifth terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the seventh terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the special current detection sensor 45a, and the ninth terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the gate detection sensor 49a.

These detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a are three-wire proximity sensors, and are provided with a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC 12 V) of the detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a, an OUT terminal for outputting the detection signal, and a GND terminal for the reference potential. The VDD terminal is supplied with the operating voltage (specifically, DC 12 V) from the eighth terminal (described later) of the fourth connector CN4 via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the second relay board PB2 via the 26th to 31st connectors CN26 to CN31. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are kept at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the fourth connector CN4 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of these detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and is in a HIGH state when a game ball is detected.

The first, third and fifth terminals through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signals of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a are the one-end terminals 115 that are preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 31, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed. By preferentially protecting the signal lines of the detection signals of these first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a from fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball enters the general winning opening 31 is fraudulently created, which would result in the fraudulent payout of game balls.

The seventh terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a is the one-end terminal 115 which is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts using conductive fraudulent tools in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, when a ball enters the special electric prize-winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. By preferentially protecting the signal line of the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a from fraudulent acts, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball has entered the special electric prize-winning device 32 from being fraudulently created, which would result in the fraudulent payment of game balls.

The ninth terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is the one-end terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, an internal lottery is triggered by an entry into the through gate 35, and if the result of the internal lottery is an electric release win, the normal power device 34a transitions to a normal power open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the signal line of the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball has entered the through gate 35 and the internal lottery from being fraudulently executed.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(c), a wire is connected to the 11th terminal of the fourth connector CN4 to electrically connect the main control device 60 and the radio wave detection sensor 202, and a wire is connected to the 13th terminal to electrically connect the main control device 60 and the magnetic detection sensor 203. The detection signal output from the radio wave detection sensor 202 to the main control device 60 is in a LOW state when no unauthorized radio waves are detected, and is in a HI state when unauthorized radio waves are detected. In addition, the detection signal output from the magnetic detection sensor 203 to the main control device 60 is in a LOW state when no unauthorized magnetic waves are detected, and is in a HI state when unauthorized magnetic waves are detected.

The eleventh terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the thirteenth terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 203 are the one-end terminals 115 that are preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud tool in the fourth connector CN4. Because the signal line of the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor 202 is preferentially protected from fraud by bringing a conductive fraud tool close, it is possible to prevent a situation in which fraudulent radio waves cannot be detected from being fraudulently created. In addition, because the signal line of the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 203 is preferentially protected from fraud by bringing a conductive fraud tool close, it is possible to prevent a situation in which fraudulent magnetism cannot be detected from being fraudulently created.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(c), the 15th terminal of the fourth connector CN4 is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the special power open detection sensor 32b, and the 17th terminal is connected to a wire for electrically connecting the main control device 60 and the normal power open detection sensor 34b.

The detection signal of the special power open detection sensor 32b rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state when the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, and the detection signal of the normal power open detection sensor 34b rises from a LOW state to a HIGH state when the normal power device 34a is in the open state. The main CPU 64 monitors the state of the special power winning device 32 and the normal power device 34a based on the state of the detection signals of these open detection sensors 32b, 34b.

The 15th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the special power open detection sensor 32b and the 17th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal of the normal power open detection sensor 34b are one-end terminals 115 that are preferentially protected from fraud using conductive fraud tools in the fourth connector CN4. Because the signal line of the detection signal of the special power open detection sensor 32b is preferentially protected from fraud, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 64 from being unable to grasp the open state of the special power winning device 32. In addition, because the signal line of the detection signal of the normal power open detection sensor 34b is preferentially protected from fraud, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 64 from being unable to grasp the open state of the normal power device 34a.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(c), a signal line for transmitting a special power drive signal from the main control device 60 to the special power drive unit 32c is connected to the 12th terminal of the fourth connector CN4, and a signal line for transmitting a normal power drive signal from the main control device 60 to the normal power drive unit 34c is connected to the 14th terminal.

The main CPU 64 determines whether the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state based on the detection signal of the special electric open detection sensor 32b. When it is determined that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state when not in the open/close execution mode, a special electric abnormality notification is issued, and the process for progressing the game (the process of steps S208 to S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) described later) is not executed. Therefore, if a fraudulent act using a conductive fraudulent tool is committed on the signal line of the special electric drive signal, the fraud can be identified by the special electric abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line of the special electric drive signal is arranged on the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4, not on the one end terminal 115. This allows the manager of the game hall to discover and respond to the fraudulent act of fraudulently opening the special electric prize winning device 32, while allowing the one end terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a fraudulent tool in the fourth connector CN4, to be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

The main CPU 64 determines whether the normal power device 34a is in the open state based on the detection signal of the normal power open detection sensor 34b. If it is determined that the normal power device 34a is in the open state when no open state win has occurred for the normal power device 34a, a normal power abnormality notification is issued and the process for progressing the game (the process of steps S208 to S219 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27) described below) is not executed. Therefore, if fraud using a conductive fraud tool is committed on the signal line of the normal power drive signal, the fraud can be identified by the normal power abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line of the normal power drive signal is located at the other end terminal 116 rather than the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. This allows the amusement hall manager to detect and respond to any fraudulent activity that may occur by fraudulently opening the special electric prize winning device 32, while also allowing the one-end terminal 115, which is given priority protection from fraudulent activities using fraudulent tools in the fourth connector CN4, to be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

As shown in Figures 21 and 23(c), a wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC 12 V is connected to the 16th terminal of the fourth connector CN4, and a wiring for supplying a power supply voltage of DC 36 V is set to the 18th terminal.

The second, sixth, eighth, tenth, nineteenth and twentieth terminals of the fourth connector CN4 are set to GND (ground). These terminals are electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 64>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to FIG.

The master CPU 64 uses various counter information during play to perform a winning lottery, setting the display of the first special symbol display section 37a, the display of the second special symbol display section 37b, the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the display setting of the normal symbol display section 38a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery to determine the winning lottery, a big win type counter C2 used for determining the big win type, a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 41 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the display duration time of each special symbol display section 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41. In addition, a normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the normal electric role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in an electric role open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are located in the lottery counter area 211 of the main RAM 66.

Each time counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special chart reserve area 212 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The special chart reserve area 212 includes a first special chart reserve area 215, a second special chart reserve area 216, and an execution area 217 for special charts.

The first special chart reserve area 215 comprises a first area 215a, a second area 215b, a third area 215c and a fourth area 215d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 215a to 215d as reserved information on the special chart side according to the winning history of the first operating port 33.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first operating port 33, the numerical information is stored in the first area 215a to the fourth area 215d in chronological order from the first area 215a → the second area 215b → the third area 215c → the fourth area 215d. By providing the four areas 215a to 215d in this way, up to four winning records of game balls entering the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored.

The number of reserved items that can be stored in the first special chart reservation area 215 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be a single number.

The second special chart reserve area 216 comprises a first area 216a, a second area 216b, a third area 216c and a fourth area 216d, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 216a to 216d as reserved information on the special chart side according to the winning history in the second operating port 34.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the second operating port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first area 216a to the fourth area 216d in chronological order from the first area 216a to the second area 216b to the third area 216c to the fourth area 216d. By providing the four areas 216a to 216d in this way, up to four winning records of game balls entering the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of reserved items that can be stored in the second special chart reservation area 216 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be any number such as two, three, five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area 217 for special charts is an area in which reserved information for targets for which hit/fail judgments and allocation judgments for special charts are performed when variable display is started in either of the special chart display units 37a, 37b. Specifically, when variable display is started in the first special chart display unit 37a, the reserved information stored in the first area 215a of the first special chart reserve area 215 is moved to the execution area 217 for special charts. On the other hand, when variable display is started in the second special chart display unit 37b, the reserved information stored in the first area 216a of the second special chart reserve area 216 is moved to the execution area 217 for special charts.

Information corresponding to the regular random number counter C4 is stored in the regular map reserve area 213 when a winning entry into the through gate 35 occurs. The regular map reserve area 213 comprises a first area 218a, a second area 218b, a third area 218c, and a fourth area 218d, and the numerical information of the regular random number counter C4 is stored in one of the areas 218a to 218d as reserved information on the regular map side according to the winning history of the through gate 35.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the through gate 35, the numerical information is stored in the first area 218a to the fourth area 218d in chronological order from the first area 218a to the second area 218b to the third area 218c to the fourth area 218d. By providing the four areas 218a to 218d in this way, up to four winning records of game balls entering the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be reserved and stored in the general map reservation area 213 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be any number such as two, three, five or more, or may be a single number.

The regular map reserve area 213 has an execution area 219 for regular maps. The execution area 219 for regular maps is an area in which reserved information for targets for support pass/fail judgment is stored when change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a. Specifically, when change display is started in the regular map display unit 38a, the reserved information stored in the first area 218a of the regular map reserve area 213 is moved to the execution area 219 for regular maps.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, the normal power random number counter C4 will be described. The normal power random number counter C4 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The normal power random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal map reserve area 213 of the main RAM 66 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the normal power feature 34a should be controlled to an open state based on the value of the stored normal power random number counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of support modes are set so that the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a differs from one another. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in the same manner into the game area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power opening state in the normal power opening lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the normal power role 34a will be in the open state when the normal power opening state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set to be longer. In this case, when the normal power opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the normal power role 34a occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time to be secured between one normal power opening lottery and the next normal power opening lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 38a) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning at the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode being in the normal power release state per unit time compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration that increases the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time (for example, the time of variable display executed in the normal power display unit 38a based on winning the through gate 35) are prepared for the time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the reserved time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, shortening the average time of the reserved time, and increasing the winning probability.

When the normal power open state is won in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4, the normal power open state is entered. The normal power open state ends when the normal power role 34a has been opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the second operating port 34. Specifically, the upper limit number is 10 regardless of whether the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode is selected. On the other hand, the number of times that the normal power role 34a is opened and closed is one time in the low frequency support mode, whereas in the high frequency support mode, it is multiple times, more than in the low frequency support mode, specifically three times. Also, the duration of one opening of the normal power role 34a is one second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is two seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 215 of the special chart reserve area 212 when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 216 of the special chart reserve area 212 when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The stored value of the winning random number counter C1 is then used to determine whether or not the game has won.

The random number value that is the winning result when determining whether or not the winning is true is stored in the main ROM 65 as a winning/losing table. In the winning/losing table, the winning/losing results are set as big win results, small win results, and losing results. The big win result is a winning/losing result that can trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, and can also trigger a transition to at least one of the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode. The small win result is a winning/losing result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, but does not trigger a transition to either the winning/losing lottery mode or the support mode. The losing result is a winning/losing result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to the winning/losing lottery mode or the support mode.

There are a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the same win/lose table is referenced for the reserved information acquired based on a win at the first operating port 33 and the reserved information acquired based on a win at the second operating port 34, and in either case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery.

To explain each win/loss table in more detail, the win/loss table for the low probability mode has two random number values that result in a big win (for example, "5" and "305"), and three random number values that result in a small win (for example, "55", "355", and "555"). The rest are random number values that result in a losing result.

In the high probability mode hit/miss table, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set to be greater than that in the low probability mode hit/miss table for the first special chart, specifically 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the random number value that results in a small win is the same as in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a win are arbitrary, and the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a low probability mode situation may be configured so that only a part of the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a high probability mode situation is included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result, or may not be included in the set of values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot result in a high probability mode situation.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special chart reserve area 215 of the special chart reserve area 212 when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, and is stored in the second special chart reserve area 216 of the special chart reserve area 212 when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. Then, the allocation determination is made using this stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, this pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of jackpot results set, and these jackpot results differ in at least one of the following three contents: (1) the contents of the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the contents of the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

The opening and closing execution mode executed when a jackpot is won is the round number-defined mode, as already explained. In the round number-defined mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set by varying the open duration from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. In detail, a long-term mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short-term mode in which the open duration is set to 0.05 seconds, which is a time shorter than the long-term mode, are set. In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In addition, the upper limit number of the end conditions for the round game is set to 10. In this case, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to a time longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of balls in one round of play. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of balls in one round of play, more specifically, a time shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of balls in one round of play, and when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the short-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not win.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round of play in a short time mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of times per round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The opening and closing execution mode that is executed when a small jackpot is won is the opening and closing number specified mode, as already explained. In the opening and closing number specified mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times in a short time mode. In this case, the upper limit number of the termination conditions of the opening and closing number specified mode is set to 10, and the total opening duration of the opening and closing number specified mode is set to a time shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the upper limit number of the opening and closing number specified mode. Therefore, the opening and closing number specified mode is configured such that a round of play is not executed, and whether or not the upper limit number is reached is determined based on the total number of winning balls during the opening and closing number specified mode, but the probability of the special electric winning device 32 opening and closing the upper limit number of times is increased.

The allocation destination of the type of jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table in the main ROM 65. The contents of the allocation table will be explained using Figures 25 (a) and (b).

As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), the distribution table sets the following types of jackpot results: 8R low probability jackpot result, 12R low probability jackpot result, 4R high probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, 8R high probability jackpot result, 12R high probability jackpot result A, 12R high probability jackpot result B, and 16R high probability jackpot result.

In the 8R low probability jackpot result, the open/close execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 8 rounds of play occur. In this open/close execution mode, 520 game balls can be expected to be paid out. In addition, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes a low probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is transitioned to. In addition, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode transitions to a low frequency support mode when the number of plays reaches a termination reference number (specifically 15 times) set as 1 or more times after the transition, and the low frequency support mode transitioned to after the high frequency support mode ends continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is transitioned to.

In the case of a 12R low probability jackpot result, the open/close execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 12 rounds of play occur. In this open/close execution mode, 780 game balls can be expected to be paid out. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes a low probability mode, regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This low probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes a low frequency support mode, regardless of the support mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This low frequency support mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result.

In the case of a 4R high probability jackpot result, the open/close execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 4 rounds of play occur. This open/close execution mode can be expected to pay out 260 game balls. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result.

In the case of a 5R high probability jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a low frequency winning mode in which five rounds of play occur. In this opening and closing execution mode, since winning into the special electric winning device 32 is not expected, the number of game balls paid out is essentially 0. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes a high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly. Furthermore, if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition is the high frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, whereas if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition is the low frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. These support modes continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly.

When an 8R high probability jackpot result occurs, the open/close execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 8 rounds of play occur. This open/close execution mode can be expected to pay out 520 game balls. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result. Furthermore, after the open/close execution mode ends, the mode becomes high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the open/close execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode as a result.

For the 12R high probability jackpot result A, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 12 rounds of play occur. This opening and closing execution mode is expected to pay out 780 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the opening and closing execution mode as a result. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode transitions to the opening and closing execution mode as a result.

12R high probability jackpot result B causes the opening and closing execution mode to become a high frequency winning mode in which 12 rounds of play occur. This opening and closing execution mode is expected to pay out 780 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, it becomes a high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly. Furthermore, if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition was the high frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, whereas if the mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition was the low frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. These support modes continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly.

When the 16R high probability jackpot result occurs, the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 16 rounds of play occur. This opening and closing execution mode can be expected to pay out 1,040 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high probability mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly. Furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the opening and closing execution mode transition. This high frequency support mode will continue at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the opening and closing execution mode transitions accordingly.

As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), the allocation tables include an allocation table for the first special symbol used when determining the allocation of reserved information acquired based on winning at the first actuation port 33, and an allocation table for the second special symbol used when determining the allocation of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second actuation port 34.

To explain each allocation table in detail, as shown in Fig. 25(a), the allocation table for the first special chart has the following types of jackpot results to be allocated: 12R low probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, 12R high probability jackpot result A, 12R high probability jackpot result B, and 16R high probability jackpot result. In the allocation table for the first special chart, "0-19" corresponds to the 12R low probability jackpot result, "20-39" corresponds to the 5R high probability jackpot result, "40-68" corresponds to the 12R high probability jackpot result A, "69-88" corresponds to the 12R high probability jackpot result B, and "89-99" corresponds to the 16R high probability jackpot result. In the case of the allocation table for the first special chart, if a jackpot is won, the probability of a 12R low probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 5R high probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 12R high probability jackpot result A is 29%, the probability of a 12R high probability jackpot result B is 20%, and the probability of a 16R high probability jackpot result is 11%.

Here, if a small win result is obtained, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this opens and closes the special electric winning device 32 five times in a short time mode. On the other hand, if a 5R high probability big win result is obtained, the mode switches to a round number regulation mode in which round play is performed with a maximum number of times of 5, and in each round play, the special electric winning device 32 opens and closes once in a short time mode. In other words, if either a 5R high probability big win result or a small win result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode appears to be the same. Also, in the game rounds in which these game results are obtained, the first special chart display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the pattern display unit 41, which has a display area set larger than the first special chart display unit 37a, displays the stop results in a manner that makes them indistinguishable. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the pattern display unit 41 displays a common pattern combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on one of the effective lines. In addition, if a 5R high probability big win occurs in the low frequency support mode, during the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this, the performance is executed in a manner indistinguishable from the opening and closing execution mode when a small win occurs based on winning the first operating port 33, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, no performance is executed on the pattern display device 41 or the like indicating that it is a high probability mode, and the performance is executed in a manner similar to that after the opening and closing execution mode when a small win occurs based on winning the first operating port 33. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation where the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are in operation, if an opening and closing execution mode that becomes a low frequency winning mode or an opening and closing number specified mode occurs, the player will play while hoping that the high probability mode will be entered after the opening and closing execution mode ends, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, if a 12R low probability big win result or a 12R high probability big win result B is obtained based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode switches to a round number regulation mode in which round play is performed with a maximum number of times of 12, and the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in each round play in a long-term mode. In other words, if either a 12R low probability big win result or a 12R high probability big win result B is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode appears to be the same. In addition, in a game round in which these game results are obtained, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the pattern display unit 41, which has a display area set larger than the first special symbol display unit 37a, displays the stop results in a manner that makes them indistinguishable. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the pattern display unit 41 displays the same combination of even symbols on any of the active lines. In addition, if a 12R high probability jackpot result B occurs in the low frequency support mode, during the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this, the performance is executed in a manner that is indistinguishable from the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a 12R low probability jackpot result, and furthermore, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, no performance is executed on the pattern display device 41 or the like that indicates that it is a high probability mode, and the performance is executed in the same manner as after the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a 12R low probability jackpot result. With the above configuration, for example, when an opening and closing execution mode in which 12 rounds of play are executed occurs in a situation in which the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are in effect, the player will play while hoping that the game will transition to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, which increases the fun of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the allocation table for the second special chart has 8R low probability jackpot result, 4R high probability jackpot result, 8R high probability jackpot result, and 16R high probability jackpot result set as the types of jackpot results to be allocated. In the allocation table for the second special chart, "0-19" corresponds to an 8R low probability jackpot result, "20-31" corresponds to a 4R high probability jackpot result, "32-55" corresponds to an 8R high probability jackpot result, and "56-99" corresponds to a 16R high probability jackpot result. In the case of the allocation table for the second special chart, when a jackpot is won, the probability of an 8R low probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 4R high probability jackpot result is 12%, the probability of an 8R high probability jackpot result is 24%, and the probability of a 16R high probability jackpot result is 44%.

Here, if an 8R low probability big win result or an 8R high probability big win result is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode switches to a round number regulation mode in which round play is performed with a maximum number of times of 8, and the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in each round play in a long-term mode. In other words, if either an 8R low probability big win result or an 8R high probability big win result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode appears to be the same. Also, in the game round in which these game results are obtained, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the pattern display unit 41, which has a display area set larger than the first special symbol display unit 37a, displays the stop results in a manner that makes them indistinguishable. Specifically, in either of the above game results, the pattern display unit 41 displays the same combination of even symbols stopped on one of the active lines. In addition, in both cases of an 8R low probability jackpot result and an 8R high probability jackpot result, during the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this, the performance is executed in a manner that makes it impossible to distinguish which jackpot result it is, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the performance is executed in a similar manner without executing a performance on the pattern display device 41 or the like that indicates that it is a high probability mode. Also, in either case, immediately after the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. With the above configuration, for example, in a situation where the high probability mode and high frequency support mode are in effect, if an opening and closing execution mode in which eight rounds of play are executed occurs, the player will play while hoping that there is no transition to the low probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, the allocation table for the first special chart and the allocation table for the second special chart have the same probability of becoming a high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a jackpot win. On the other hand, the allocation table for the second special chart has a higher probability of becoming a high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode than the allocation table for the first special chart. More specifically, the allocation table for the first special chart can become a low frequency winning mode, whereas the allocation table for the second special chart cannot become a low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, in the allocation table for the first special chart, the probability of the most favorable jackpot result, the 16R high probability jackpot result, is 11%, which is the lowest allocation probability compared to other jackpot results, whereas in the allocation table for the second special chart, the probability of the most favorable jackpot result, the 16R high probability jackpot result, is 44%, which is the highest allocation probability compared to other jackpot results. Therefore, in terms of the types of jackpot results that can be selected in the event of a jackpot win, it is more advantageous for the player to have a jackpot win at second actuation port 34 and an internal lottery drawn, than to have a jackpot win at first actuation port 33 and an internal lottery drawn.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expectation effect is set as a type of display effect in the pattern display device 41. The expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player think that the change display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result in a gaming machine that has a pattern display device 41 capable of performing a change display of patterns, and in which the final stop result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result is a grant corresponding result, from the start of the change display of patterns in the pattern display device 41 to the stage at which the stop result is derived and displayed. Note that, specifically, the award corresponding result is displayed as a combination of patterns with the same number on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expectation effects: reach displays and warning displays that are set to anticipate the occurrence of reach displays or corresponding results before the reach display occurs.

The reach display includes a display state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of the patterns for some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a reduced or hidden display of the reach pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display surface 41a.

The advance notice display includes a mode in which characters are displayed separately from the patterns on the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in a situation in which the patterns are displayed in a changing manner in all pattern columns Z1 to Z3 after the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 starts displaying the changing patterns, or in a situation in which the patterns are displayed in a changing manner in some pattern columns. It also includes a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a mode in which the patterns on the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice displays can occur in both game rounds when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Also, in a game round corresponding to a big win result or a small win result in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 65 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main CPU 64, but by the audio and light control device 70. In this case, the audio and light control device 70 executes a lottery process for the preview display so that a game round corresponding to a big win or small win result satisfies at least one of the conditions that a preview display is more likely to occur and that a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a miss result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the performance for the game round is executed by the pattern display device 41.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The change type counter CS is used by the main CPU 64 to determine the display duration in the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the value of the change type counter CS is obtained when determining the change pattern at the start of the change display in the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b, and at the start of the pattern change by the pattern display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 64>
Next, we will explain each process executed to progress the game by the master CPU 64. The processes of the master CPU 64 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 millisecond period in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In this power-on wait processing, the process waits for, for example, one second to elapse after the main processing is started without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 66 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the main CPU 64 are set.

Then, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch has been manually operated. As already explained, the RAM erase switch is provided on the power supply and launch control device 78, and when initializing the RAM data when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. In the following step S105, it is determined whether the power outage flag of the main RAM 66 is set to "1". In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data is determined.

If the RAM clear switch is pressed (step S104: YES), the process proceeds to step S108. Also, if the power interruption occurrence information has not been set (step S105: NO) or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by a checksum (step S107: NO), the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 66 is cleared to initialize the main RAM 66. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed (step S104: NO), the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S105: YES) and the checksum is normal (step S107: YES). In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 66, such as the power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70 to recognize the current game state.

Then, proceed to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In other words, the main CPU 64 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processing, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 66, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 27. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power interruption has been received from the power outage monitoring circuit 201, and if a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed. In the power outage process, the payout reset signal output from the main CPU 64 to the payout CPU 222 is lowered from a HI state to a LOW state. As already explained, when the payout CPU 222 detects the falling edge of the payout reset signal, it executes a process to initialize the payout RAM 224.

In the following step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular random number counter C4, and a process is executed to add 1 to each of the read numerical information, and then a process is executed to overwrite the counter from which it was read out. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, each is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed similarly to step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed similarly to step S112.

In the next step S205, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not the detection of fraudulent radio waves and the detection of fraudulent magnetism, which are set as the monitoring target for fraud, has occurred. As already explained with reference to FIG. 21, the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203 are connected to the input side of the MPU 63 via the second relay board PB2 and the fourth connector CN4. In the fraud detection process in step S205, the main CPU 64 monitors whether or not fraud of the monitoring target has occurred based on the state of the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the detection signal received from the magnetic detection sensor 203. As already explained, the main CPU 64 determines that a fraudulent radio wave has been detected when it detects a rise from a LOW state to a HI state of the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202, and determines that a fraudulent magnetism has been detected when it detects a rise from a LOW state to a HI state of the detection signal received from the magnetic detection sensor 203. In the fraud detection process in step S205, if it is determined that any fraud has occurred, it transmits a fraud detection notification command to the audio and light emission control device 70. When the audio and light emission control device 70 receives the fraud detection notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 to issue a fraud detection notification, and also controls the display control device 90. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 issue a notification that a monitored fraud has occurred. After that, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the processing for progressing the game (the processing of steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed.

Then, the special electric normal power monitoring process is executed (step S206). In the special electric normal power monitoring process, if the open/close execution mode is not selected, it is determined whether the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the special electric open detection sensor 32b. Then, if it is determined that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, it transmits a special electric abnormality notification command to the sound and light emission control device 70. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives the special electric abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 so that a special electric abnormality notification is performed, and controls the display control device 90. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 notify the user that fraud has occurred with respect to the special electric winning device 32. Then, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the process for progressing the game (the process of steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed. In addition, in the special power/normal power monitoring process (step S206), if the open state of the normal power role 34a has not been won, it is determined whether the normal power role 34a is in the open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the normal power open detection sensor 34b. Then, if it is determined that the normal power role 34a is in the open state, a normal power abnormality notification command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives the normal power abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 so that a normal power abnormality notification is performed, and controls the display control device 90. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 notify that a fraud has occurred with the normal power role 34a. After that, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the process for progressing the game (the process of steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether the game progress has been stopped by determining whether the game stop flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". If a positive determination is made in step S207, this timer interrupt process ends without executing the process for progressing the game (the process of steps S208 to S219). In this way, when the game stop flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", the process for progressing the game is no longer executed.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S207, the process from step S208 onwards is executed. In step S208, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, if output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 32c, 34c. For example, if information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32c is started, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if information is set to switch the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34c is started, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the next step S209, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, in step S210, the ball entry detection process is executed. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU 64. As already explained, the first operating port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the second connector CN2 on the main control board 61, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the third connector CN3 on the main control board 61. In addition, the first to third winning port detection sensors 42a to 44a, the special current detection sensor 45a, the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a are electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the fourth connector CN4 on the main control board 61.

In the ball entry detection process, first, it is determined whether one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S301). In step S301, if the detection signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is in the HI state, the first winning hole flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in the LOW state, the first winning hole flag is cleared to "0". The first winning hole flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. In step S301, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a when the value of the first winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S301, the value of the discharged ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S302), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S303). The discharged ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to grasp the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. The discharged ball counter is a 7-bit counter, and any numerical information of "0" to "127" is stored in the discharged ball counter. The 10-ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. If the value of the 10-ball counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 executes a process to output a 10-ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S301, or if the processing of step S303 is performed, it is judged whether or not one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S304). In step S304, if the detection signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is in a HI state, the second winning hole flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the second winning hole flag is cleared to "0". The second winning hole flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. In step S304, if the value of the second winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1", it is judged that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. If a positive judgment is made in step S304, the value of the dispensed ball counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S305), and the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S306).

If a negative judgment is made in step S304, or if the processing of step S306 is performed, it is judged whether or not one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S307). In step S307, if the detection signal received from the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is in the HI state, the third winning hole flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in the LOW state, the third winning hole flag is cleared to "0". The third winning hole flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. In step S307, if the value of the third winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1", it is judged that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. If a positive judgment is made in step S307, the value of the dispensed ball counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S308), and the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S309).

If a negative judgment is made in step S307, or if the processing of step S309 is performed, it is judged whether or not one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310). In step S310, if the detection signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a is in a HI state, the special electric flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the special electric flag is cleared to "0". The special electric flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a. In step S310, it is judged that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a when the value of the special electric flag changes from "0" to "1".

If a positive judgment is made in step S310, the value of the payout number counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S311), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S312). The 15 prize ball counter is a counter that the main CPU 64 uses to determine the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 64 executes a process to output a 15 prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27)) described below.

If a negative determination is made in step S310, or if the processing of step S312 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S313). In step S313, if the detection signal received from the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is in a HI state, the first actuation port flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the first actuation port flag is cleared to "0". The first actuation port flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. In step S313, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a when the value of the first actuation port flag changes from "0" to "1".

If a positive determination is made in step S313, the first activation winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S314). The first activation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to identify that one game ball has entered the first activation port 33. If the first activation winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 executes a process to newly store reserved information in the first special chart reserved area 215 in the special chart special power control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later, on the condition that the number of reserved information stored in the first to fourth areas 215a to 215d of the first special chart reserved area 215 is less than the upper limit of four.

Then, the value of the payout number counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S315), and the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S316). The single prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 64 to determine the number of times that one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 64 executes a process to output a single prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27)) described below.

If a negative determination is made in step S313, or if the processing of step S316 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S317). In step S317, if the detection signal received from the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is in a HI state, the second actuation port flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the second actuation port flag is cleared to "0". The second actuation port flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. In step S317, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a if the value of the second actuation port flag changes from "0" to "1".

If a positive determination is made in step S317, the second activation winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S318). The second activation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to identify that one game ball has entered the second activation port 34. If the second activation winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 executes a process to newly store reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 216 in the special chart special power control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described later, on the condition that the number of reserved information stored in the first to fourth areas 216a to 216d of the second special chart reserved area 216 is less than the upper limit of four.

Then, the value of the number of dispensed balls counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S319), and the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S320).

If a negative judgment is made in step S317, or if the processing of step S320 is performed, it is judged whether or not one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S321). In step S321, if the detection signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a is in a HI state, the outlet flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the outlet flag is cleared to "0". The outlet flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a. In step S321, if the value of the outlet flag changes from "0" to "1", it is judged that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. If a positive judgment is made in step S321, the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S322).

If a negative determination is made in step S321, or if the processing of step S322 is performed, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S323). In step S323, if the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a is in a HI state, a gate flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", and if the detection signal is in a LOW state, the gate flag is cleared to "0". The gate flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a. In step S323, if the value of the gate flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

If a positive judgment is made in step S323, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S324). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 64 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. If the gate winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 executes a process in the normal map normal power control process (step S215 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27)) described later to store the current numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 as normal map side reserved information in the normal map reserve area 213, provided that the number of normal map side reserved information stored in the first to fourth areas 218a to 218d of the normal map reserve area 213 is less than the upper limit of four.

If a negative judgment is made in step S323, or if the processing of step S324 is performed, the discharge number management process is executed (step S325), and the ball entry detection process is terminated. In the discharge number management process, it is determined whether the value of the discharge number counter in the main RAM 66 has reached "100". If the value of the discharge number counter has reached "100", the discharge information flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" and the value of the discharge number counter is decremented by "100". The discharge information flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp that "100" game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. When the discharge information flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 executes a process in the external information setting process (step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described below to output information indicating that "100" game balls have been discharged from the game area PA to the external terminal board 79.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (Figure 27), after the ball entry detection process is executed in step S210, a timer update process is executed in step S211 to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 66. In this case, the timer counters in which the stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled in a consolidated manner, but it is also possible to configure the system to centrally update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

In the next step S212, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the game balls. In the launch control process, as already explained, a launch permission signal is sent to the power supply and launch control device 78 on the condition that a launch status signal has been received from the power supply and launch control device 78. As already explained, the launch status signal is sent from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61, and the launch permission signal is sent from the main CPU 64 to the power supply and launch control device 78 via the first connector CN1. By receiving the launch status signal from the power supply and launch control device 78, the main CPU 64 knows that a launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28. In the launch control process, when the launch operation is continuing on the launch operation device 28, a launch permission signal is sent at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 seconds.

In the following step S213, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S209, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are checked for disconnections and the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are checked for opening.

In the next step S214, a special chart special electricity control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening and closing execution mode. The details of the special chart special electricity control process will be explained in detail later.

In the next step S215, the normal map normal power control process is executed. In the normal map normal power control process, by confirming that the gate winning flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1", the process is executed to store the current numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 as the reserved information of the normal map side in the normal power reserve area 65c as the reserved information of the normal map side, provided that the number of reserved information of the normal map side stored in the normal power reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit of four, and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the normal map normal power control process in step S215, if the numerical information of the normal power random number counter C4 is stored, an opening judgment is made for the numerical information, and the opening judgment is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing a performance for the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a. Furthermore, in the normal map normal power control process in step S215, a process is executed to open and close the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 based on the result of the opening judgment.

In the next step S216, a display control process is executed. In the display control process, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the first special chart display unit 37a in the first special chart reserved display unit 37c, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the second special chart display unit 37b in the second special chart reserved display unit 37d, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information related to the ordinary chart display unit 38a in the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b. In addition, in the display control process in step S216, output information is set to update the display contents of the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and output information is set to update the display contents of the ordinary chart display unit 38a. Furthermore, in the display control process in step S216, output information is set to update the display contents of the round display unit 39 based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214.

In the next step S217, the contents of the command and signal received from the dispensing control device 77 are confirmed, and a dispensing status receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. The details of the dispensing status receiving process will be described later.

Then, in step S218, a payout output process is executed to set various prize ball commands as output targets. In the payout output process, a process is executed to send a prize ball command (a 1 prize ball command, a 10 prize ball command, or a 15 prize ball command) to the payout control device 77 based on the values of the 1 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66. Details of the payout output process will be described later.

In the following step S219, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process, and then this timer interrupt process is terminated. As already explained, the main CPU 64 is connected to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61, and the external terminal board 79 is connected to the external device, the amusement hall's management computer (not shown). In the external information setting process in step S219, settings are made to output information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 64 on the external terminal board 79. As already explained, the external signals output from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 include a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a signal indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, a signal indicating that one round of play has ended, a signal indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100 balls) of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34.

The management computer receives this information from the main CPU 64 via the external terminal board 79, and also receives various information (described later) from the payout control device 77 via the external terminal board 79. Then, according to the various information received from the pachinko machine 10, it calculates the payout rate (the percentage of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and other information, thereby grasping the execution mode of the payout of game balls in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the payout timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 222 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 29. The payout timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 milliseconds).

In the payout timer interrupt process, first, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, it is determined whether the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor already described, and if the tank is full, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and sends a full tank state command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 64. In addition, if the full tank state is released, it executes a process to enable the payout of game balls and sends a full tank state release command indicating that the full tank state has been released to the main CPU 64. These full tank state command and full tank state release command are sent to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the tank is full when it receives a full tank state command, and recognizes that the full tank state has been released when it receives a full tank state release command.

Then, the no-ball process is executed (step S402). In the no-ball process, it is determined whether or not the state is a no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor already described, and if the state is a no-ball state, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and sends a no-ball state command indicating the no-ball state to the main CPU 64. In addition, if the no-ball state is released, it executes a process to enable the payout of game balls and sends a no-ball state release command indicating that the no-ball state has been released to the main CPU 64. These no-ball state commands and no-ball state release commands are sent to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the state is a no-ball state when it receives a no-ball state command, and recognizes that the no-ball state has been released when it receives a no-ball state release command.

Then, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state exists based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout abnormality state exists, a process to stop the payout of the game balls is executed and a payout abnormality state command indicating that the payout abnormality state exists is sent to the main CPU 64. In addition, if the payout abnormality state is released, a process to enable the payout of the game balls is executed and a payout abnormality state release command indicating that the payout abnormality state has been released is sent to the main CPU 64. These payout abnormality state command and payout abnormality state release command are sent to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the payout abnormality state exists when it receives the payout abnormality state command, and recognizes that the payout abnormality state has been released when it receives the payout abnormality state release command.

Then, the front door open monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the state of the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225, and if the front door frame 14 is open, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls and sends a front door open command to the main CPU 64. In addition, if the front door frame 14 is closed, it executes a process to enable the payout of game balls and sends a front door close command to the main CPU 64. These front door open command and front door close command are sent to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. In the payout status receiving process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the front door frame 14 is open when it receives the front door open command, and recognizes that the front door frame 14 is closed when it receives the front door close command.

Then, the main body open monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the main body open sensor 226, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, it executes a process to stop the payout of the gaming balls and sends a main body open command to the main CPU 64. In addition, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, it executes a process to enable the payout of the gaming balls and sends a main body close command to the main CPU 64. These main body open command and main body close command are sent to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. In the payout state receiving process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the gaming machine main body 12 is open when it receives the main body open command, and recognizes that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed when it receives the main body close command.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the unpaid counter provided in the payout side RAM 224 is 1 or more (step S406). As already explained, the unpaid counter is a counter for the payout side CPU 222 to grasp the number of unpaid game balls. If a negative determination is made in step S406, it is determined whether any of a 1 prize ball command, a 10 prize ball command, and a 15 prize ball command has been received from the main CPU 64 (step S407). If any prize ball command has been received (step S407: YES), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received prize ball command is set in the unpaid counter (step S408). In step S408, if a 1 prize ball command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "1", if a 10 prize ball command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "10", and if a 15 prize ball command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "15".

Then, the prize ball permission signal is turned from HI to LOW (step S409). The prize ball permission signal is a signal that indicates whether or not it is possible to send a prize ball command (one prize ball command, ten prize ball command, or fifteen prize ball command) from the main CPU 64 to the payout CPU 222. When the prize ball permission signal is in HI, it is possible to send a prize ball command, and when the prize ball permission signal is in LOW, it is not possible to send a prize ball command. The prize ball permission signal is set to HI when the value of the unpaid counter in the payout RAM 224 is "0", and is set to LOW when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more.

If a positive determination is made in step S406, or if the processing of step S409 is performed, a payout control process is performed (step S410). In the payout control process, the payout device 76 is controlled so that one game ball is paid out. After that, the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is decremented by 1 (step S411), and it is determined whether the value of the unpaid counter after the decrement has become "0" (step S412). If a positive determination is made in step S412, the prize ball permission signal is raised from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S413).

When a negative judgment is made in step S407, when a negative judgment is made in step S412, or when the processing of step S413 is performed, a payout side external information setting process is performed (step S414). As already explained, some of the external terminals on the external terminal board 79, which are multiple external terminals, are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 222. In the payout side external information setting process in step S414, information output to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 222 on the external terminal board 79 is set. As already explained, the information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out. The management computer receives various information from the main CPU 64 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, based on the various information received, the payout rate (the percentage of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10) and other information are calculated to grasp the execution mode of the payout of game balls in the pachinko machine 10.

Then, a reset response process is executed (step S415), and this dispensing side timer interrupt process is terminated. In the reset response process, based on the state of the dispensing reset signal received from the main CPU 64, it is determined whether or not a power interruption has occurred in the main CPU 64, and if it is determined that a power interruption has not occurred, this dispensing side timer interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, a process corresponding to a power outage is executed, and an infinite loop is entered. By executing the process corresponding to a power outage, the dispensing side RAM 224 is initialized.

Next, the payout status reception process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30. Note that the payout status reception process is executed in step S217 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout status reception process, first, a full tank status response process is performed (step S501). In the full tank status response process, if a full tank status command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a full tank notification command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 70. In the full tank status response process, if the audio and light emission control device 70 receives a full tank notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that a notification that the tank is full is made. In addition, in the full tank status response process, if a full tank status release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or a payout reset signal is received, it sends a full tank notification end command to the audio and light emission control device 70. In the full tank status response process, if the audio and light emission control device 70 receives a full tank notification end command, it ends the notification that the tank is full that is being made by the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41.

After that, a no-ball state response process is performed (step S502). In the no-ball state response process, if a no-ball state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a no-ball notification command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 70. When the audio and light-emitting control device 70 receives a no-ball notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that a notification of the no-ball state is made. In addition, in the no-ball state response process, if a no-ball state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or a payout reset signal is received, a no-ball notification end command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 70. When the audio and light-emitting control device 70 receives a no-ball notification end command, it ends the notification of the no-ball state being performed by the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41.

After that, the abnormal payout state handling process is performed (step S503). In the abnormal payout state handling process, if a payout abnormal state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a payout abnormality notification command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. In the abnormal payout state handling process, if the sound and light emission control device 70 receives a payout abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that an abnormal payout state is notified. In the abnormal payout state handling process, if a payout abnormality release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or a payout reset signal is received, it sends an abnormal payout notification end command to the sound and light emission control device 70. In the abnormal payout state handling process, if the sound and light emission control device 70 receives a payout abnormality notification end command, it ends the notification of the abnormal payout state being performed by the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41.

Then, a front door open state response process is performed (step S504). In the front door open state response process, if a front door open state command is received from the dispensing side CPU 222, a front door open notification command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 70. In the front door open state response process, if the audio and light emission control device 70 receives a front door open notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (Figure 1) and the display control device 90 so that a notification is made that the front door is open. In addition, in the front door open state response process, if a front door open state release command is received from the dispensing side CPU 222, it sends a front door open notification end command to the audio and light emission control device 70. In the front door open state response process, if the audio and light emission control device 70 receives a front door open notification end command, it ends the notification that the front door is open, which is being made by the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41.

After that, the main body open state response process is performed (step S505), and this payout state receiving process is terminated. In the main body open state response process, if a main body open state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a main body open notification command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives a main body open notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that a notification that the main body is open is made. Also, in the main body open state response process, if a main body open state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222, it sends a main body open notification end command to the sound and light emission control device 70. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives a main body open notification end command, it ends the notification that the main body is open, which is being performed by the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41.

Next, the payout output process executed by the main CPU 64 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31. Note that the payout output process is executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout output process, first, it is determined whether the prize ball permission signal received from the payout side CPU 222 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61 is in the HI state (step S601). If the prize ball permission signal is in the LOW state (step S601: NO), this payout output process is terminated. On the other hand, if the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether the value of the 15 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S602). If a positive determination is made in step S602, the 15 prize ball command is set as the output target (step S603). The 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S604), and this payout output process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S602, it is judged whether the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is 1 or greater (step S605). If a positive judgment is made in step S605, a 10 prize ball command is set as the output target (step S606). The 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S607), and this payout output process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S605, it is judged whether the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 66 is 1 or greater (step S608). If a positive judgment is made in step S608, a single prize ball command is set as the output target (step S609). The single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61. After that, the value of the single prize ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S610), and this payout output process is terminated.

As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is not supplied to the payout RAM 224. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the value of the unpaid counter in the payout RAM 224 is 1 or more, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout RAM 224 (the value of the unpaid counter) is lost. In contrast, in this embodiment, a prize ball command is sent from the main CPU 64 to the payout CPU 222 on the condition that the value of the unpaid counter in the payout RAM 224 is "0". Therefore, the maximum value of the number of unpaid prize balls (the value of the unpaid counter) stored in the payout RAM 224 is "15" when a 15-ball command is received. By setting the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 to 15 or less, the number of unpaid prize balls that will be lost if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while information on the number of unpaid prize balls exists in the payout side RAM 224 is reduced.

<Special chart special signal control processing>
Next, the special picture special power control process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 32. The special picture special power control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 27).

In the special chart special electricity control process, if a winning entry has been made into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, a process is executed to acquire reserved information, and if reserved information is stored, a win/loss determination is made on the reserved information, and further, a process is executed to perform a performance for a game round triggered by the win/loss determination. Based on the result of the win/loss determination, a process is executed to transition to an open/close execution mode after the performance for a game round, and processes are executed during the open/close execution mode and when the open/close execution mode ends.

In the special chart special power control process, first, in step S701, a process for acquiring reserved information on the special chart side is executed. In this acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operation port 33 based on the value of the first operation winning flag in the main side RAM 66. If a game ball has entered the first operation port 33, the number of reserved information stored in the first special chart reserve area 215 is read, and if the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the first special chart reserve area 215 where no reserved information is stored. Then, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in this acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 based on the value of the second operation winning flag in the main side RAM 66. When a game ball has entered the second actuation port 34, the number of reserved information stored in the second special chart reserve area 216 is read, and if the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit (specifically, "4"), the values of the win random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the topmost area of the first special chart reserve area 215 where no reserved information is stored. Then, the second actuation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the pending information acquisition process in step S701, if pending information for the first special chart pending area 215 or the second special chart pending area 216 is acquired, a pending command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 70. The audio and light emission control device 70 sends a command corresponding to the received pending command to the display control device 90. By receiving the pending command, the display control device 90 changes the display of the number of pending information on the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of pending items. In this case, since the pending command includes information indicating which of the first special chart pending area 215 and the second special chart pending area 216 the pending information has increased, the display of the number of pending items corresponding to the side that has increased is changed on the pattern display device 41.

In addition, when the number of reserved items increases as described above, in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27), display control is performed so that the display content of either the first special chart reserved display section 37c or the second special chart reserved display section 37d, whichever corresponds to the increase in the number of reserved items, is changed to one that corresponds to the increase in the number of reserved items.

In the next step S702, the information of the special diagram special signal counter provided in the main RAM 66 is read, and in step S703, the special diagram special signal address table stored in the main ROM 65 is read. Then, in step S704, a start address corresponding to the information of the special diagram special signal counter is obtained from the special diagram special signal address table.

Here, we will explain the processing steps S702 to S704.

As already explained, the special chart special electricity control process includes a process for controlling the presentation for a play round and a process for controlling the open/close execution mode. In this case, the processes for controlling the presentation for a play round are set to include a special chart change start process (step S706), which is a process for starting the presentation for a play round, a special chart change in progress process (step S707), which is a process for progressing the presentation for a play round, and a special chart confirmation process (step S708), which is a process for ending the presentation for a play round.

In addition, the following processes are set as processes for controlling the opening and closing execution mode: special line start process (step S709), which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening and closing execution mode; special line open process (step S710), which is a process for controlling the state of the special line winning device 32 while it is open; special line closed process (step S711), which is a process for controlling the state of the special line winning device 32 while it is closed; and special line end process (step S712), which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening and closing execution mode and the transition of the game state when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In such a processing configuration, the special chart special electricity counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 64 to determine which of the above-mentioned multiple types of processing should be executed, and the special chart special electricity address table is set with the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned multiple types of processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter.

In this case, start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special chart change start process (step S706), start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special chart change in progress process (step S707), start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special chart confirmation in progress process (step S708), start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special line start process (step S709), start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special line open process (step S710), start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special line closed process (step S711), and start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special line end process (step S712).

When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" according to the processing to be executed in the special chart special electricity control processing in the next processing round, triggered by the condition for updating the numerical information being met. Therefore, in the special chart special electricity control processing in each processing round, it is sufficient to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the special chart special electricity counter. The special chart special electricity counter is set to 0 as its initial value.

After executing the process of step S704, in step S705, a process is executed to jump to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S704. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, jump to the special chart change start process of step S706, if the acquired start address is SA1, jump to the special chart change process of step S707, if the acquired start address is SA2, jump to the special chart confirmation process of step S708, if the acquired start address is SA3, jump to the special line start process of step S709, if the acquired start address is SA4, jump to the special line open process of step S710, if the acquired start address is SA5, jump to the special line closed process of step S711, if the acquired start address is SA6, jump to the special line end process of step S712. If any of the processes of steps S706 to S712 is executed, this special chart special line control process is terminated. Below, we will explain the processing of steps S706 to S712 individually.

<Special chart change start processing>
First, the special chart change start process in step S706 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether reserved information is stored in either the first special chart reserved area 215 or the second special chart reserved area 216. If a negative determination is made in step S801, the special chart change start process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S801, data setting process is executed (step S802).

In the data setting process in step S802, first, it is determined whether the reserved number in the second special chart reserved area 216 is "0" or not. If the reserved number in the second special chart reserved area 216 is "0", the data setting process for the first special chart is executed. If the reserved number in the second special chart reserved area 216 is not "0", the data setting process for the second special chart is executed. Here, as already explained, the case where the data setting process is executed is when reserved information is stored in either the first special chart reserved area 215 or the second special chart reserved area 216. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether the reserved number in the second special chart reserved area 216 is "0" or not. If it is not "0", that is, if reserved information for variable display is stored for the second special chart display unit 37b, the data stored in the second special chart reserved area 216 is set for variable display regardless of whether the reserved number in the first special chart reserved area 215 is 1 or more. As a result, if reserved information is stored in both the first special chart reserved area 215 and the second special chart reserved area 216, the reserved information stored in the second special chart reserved area 216 corresponding to the second operating port 34 will be given priority as the target for starting a game round.

In the data setting process for the first special chart performed in the data setting process (step S802), the data stored in the first area 215a of the first special chart reserve area 215 is first moved to the execution area 217 for the special chart. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the first special chart reserve area 215. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas 215a to 215d in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area 215a is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 215b to the first area 215a, the third area 215c to the second area 215b, and the fourth area 215d to the third area 215c. Then, the second special chart flag provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0". The second special chart flag is a flag for specifying whether the start of the current variable display is the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b. Then, a shift command, which is information for making the audio/light emitting control device 70 recognize that the data in the first special chart reserved area 215 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. The audio/light emitting control device 70 transmits a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 90, thereby changing the display of the number of reserved information corresponding to the first special chart reserved area 215 in the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number. Also, when the number of reserved information in the first special chart reserved area 215 is decreased as described above, the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) controls the display of the first special chart reserved display unit 37c to change to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the reserved number.

In the data setting process for the second special chart performed in the data setting process (step S802), first, the data stored in the first area 216a of the second special chart reserve area 216 is moved to the execution area 217 for the special chart. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the second special chart reserve area 216. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas 216a to 216d in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area 216a is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area 216b to the first area 216a, the third area 216c to the second area 216b, and the fourth area 216d to the third area 216c. Then, the second special chart flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". Then, a shift command, which is information for making the sound and light emission control device 70 recognize that the data in the second special chart reserve area 216 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. In the sound and light emission control device 70, a command corresponding to the received shift command is sent to the display control device 90, and the display of the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special chart reserved area 216 in the pattern display device 41 is changed to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number. Also, when the number of reserved information in the second special chart reserved area 216 is decreased as described above, the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) controls the display of the second special chart reserved display unit 37d to change to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the reserved number.

After executing the data setting process in step S802, the hit/miss determination process is executed in step S803. In the hit/miss determination process, first, it is determined whether the hit/miss lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination information stored in the execution area 217 for the special chart, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for the high probability, by referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 65. Also, if it is the low probability mode, it is determined whether the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 217 for the special chart matches the jackpot numerical information for the low probability by referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 65.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination process in step S803 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, an allocation determination process is executed in step S805. In the allocation determination process, it is determined whether the second special chart flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" to determine which reserved information in the first special chart reserve area 215 or the second special chart reserve area 216 corresponds to the current game round. Then, the allocation table corresponding to the determination result is selected from the allocation table for the first special chart (see FIG. 25(a)) and the allocation table for the second special chart (see FIG. 25(b)). After the allocation table is selected, it is determined which type of jackpot result the information for allocation determination among the reserved information stored in the execution area 217 for the special chart, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, corresponds to in the selected allocation table. Specifically, when the allocation table for the first special chart is selected, it is determined which of the following jackpot results it corresponds to: 12R low probability jackpot result, 5R high probability jackpot result, 12R high probability jackpot result A, 12R high probability jackpot result B, and 16R high probability jackpot result. Also, when the allocation table for the second special chart is selected, it is determined which of the following jackpot results it corresponds to: 8R low probability jackpot result, 4R high probability jackpot result, 8R high probability jackpot result, and 16R high probability jackpot result.

In the next step S806, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 65, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 66. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of pattern patterns to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result, and in step S806, information on the pattern patterns corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in step S805 is stored in the main RAM 66.

The type of picture displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the type of picture may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or multiple types of picture types may be set for each jackpot result.

In the following step S807, a flag set process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result are provided in the main RAM 66, and in step S807, the flag corresponding to the distribution determination result of step S805 is set to "1" among the flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that the result is not a big win, then in step S808, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination process in step S803 is a small win result. If it is a small win result, then in step S809, a stop result setting process for the small win result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b in this game round is identified from the stop result table for the small win result stored in the main ROM 65 in advance, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 66. The information on the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern selected in the case of a big win result. In the following step S810, the small win flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1". The small win flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp that a small win result has occurred in the win/loss determination process in step S803.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed in step S811. Specifically, information on the pattern type to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 37a or the second special pattern display unit 37b in the current game round is identified from a stop result table for miss results pre-stored in the main ROM 65, and the identified information is stored in the main RAM 66. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a big win result and the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a small win result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S807, step S810, and step S811, in step S812, a display duration acquisition process is executed. In this acquisition process, information on the display duration for the current game round is acquired according to the current game state, the result of the win/lose determination process, the result of the allocation determination process, the presence or absence of a reach display, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the number of reserved information.

In the next step S813, the information corresponding to the display duration acquired in step S812 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process already explained (step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)). Incidentally, as a performance for a game round, the first special chart display unit 37a or the second special chart display unit 37b displays a changing pattern, and the pattern display unit 41 displays a changing pattern. When each of these changing displays is ended, the final stop display is performed for the final stop time in a state in which the stop result of that game round is displayed (in the pattern display unit 41, a predetermined combination of patterns is waiting on the active line). In this case, the display duration acquired in step S812 is the total time for one game round, and in step S813, the information of the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the display duration acquired in step S812 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter.

In the next step S814, the change command and the type command are sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. As already explained, these change commands and type commands are sent to the sound and light emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7 in the main control board 61. The change command is a 2-byte data configuration, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and data corresponding to the display duration. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data for indicating that it is a change command, the next 4 bits of data set lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process, the next 1 bit of data set trigger data indicating which of the reserved information in the first special chart reserved area 215 and the second special chart reserved area 216 is the trigger, and the remaining 7 bits of data set time data corresponding to the display duration. Therefore, when the sound and light emission control device 70 receives a variation command, it recognizes that it is a variation command from the identification data, recognizes the results of the win/lose determination process and the allocation determination process from the lottery result data, and recognizes the display duration of the current game from the time data. Here, since the main CPU 64 selects a different display duration depending on whether or not a reach has occurred, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the sound and light emission control device 70 can identify whether or not a reach has occurred from the display duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the variation command may also include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

The type command is composed of two bytes of data, and the two bytes of data include data corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, data on whether the mode is high probability mode or not, and data on whether the mode is high frequency support mode or not. Specifically, the upper four bits of the two bytes of data set identification data to indicate that the command is a type command, the next four bits of data set lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process, and the remaining eight bits of data set status recognition data on whether the mode is high probability mode or not and high frequency support mode or not. Therefore, when the audio and light emission control device 70 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, recognizes the results of the hit/miss judgment process and the distribution judgment process from the lottery result data, and recognizes whether the mode is high probability mode or not and high frequency support mode or not from the status recognition data.

Here, both the variable command and the type command contain data corresponding to the result of the winning/losing judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process. Therefore, in the voice and light emission control device 70, by comparing the lottery result data included in the variable command with the lottery result data included in the type command, it is possible to determine whether or not a communication abnormality such as noise has occurred in the reception of the variable command and the type command. If both lottery result data match, control for the performance corresponding to the content of the variable command and the type command is executed, and if both lottery result data do not match, it is possible to notify this. Incidentally, in the latter case, the voice and light emission control device 70 may be configured to execute a game round performance corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game round, and for example, in the game round performance, regardless of the results of the winning/losing judgment process and the distribution judgment process, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to stop and display a combination of patterns corresponding to a complete miss. In this case, the game round performance may be configured to be performed for a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variable command, or may be configured to continue until the next variable command and type command are received. The variation command may be configured to not include either the result of the pass/fail determination process or the result of the allocation determination process, or may not include both data.

After executing the process of step S814, in step S815, the display of the changing pattern is started in the display section that is the target of execution of the current game round, either the first special chart display section 37a or the second special chart display section 37b. In the following step S816, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1. In this case, since the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is "0" when the special chart change start process is executed, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "1" when the process of step S816 is executed. Thereafter, this special chart change start process is terminated.

<Special chart change processing>
Next, the special chart changing process in step S707 in the special chart special electric control process (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special pattern change process, it is determined whether or not it is during the duration of a game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, a process is executed to regularly change the display mode of the pattern in either the first special pattern display section 37a or the second special pattern display section 37b, whichever is the target of execution for the current game round. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. Furthermore, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not a winning result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

In addition, instead of waiting in the special chart change process until the timing for the final stop display is reached, if it is not the timing for the final stop display, the process for making the above-mentioned regular changes is executed, and then the special chart change process is terminated. Therefore, after the performance for the game round is started, the special chart change process is started each time the special chart special electricity control process is started until the timing for the final stop display is reached. In addition, when the timing for the final stop display is reached, in order to have the pattern display device 41 display the final stop result of the current game round, a final stop command is sent to the sound emission control device 70, and the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round, among the first special chart display unit 37a and the second special chart display unit 37b, is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, information on the final stop time (0.5 seconds) of the game round is read from the main side ROM 65 and set in the special chart special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special chart special electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special chart change process to the one corresponding to the special chart confirmation process.

<Special drawing confirmation processing>
Next, the special drawing confirmation process in step S708 in the special drawing special electric control process (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special chart determination process, it is determined whether the final stop time for this game round has elapsed, and if the final stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment that triggered this game round was a big win or a small win. If the result of the win/loss judgment that triggered this game round was neither a big win nor a small win, the value of the special chart special electricity counter is cleared to "0" and this special chart determination process is terminated. As a result, the special chart change start process will be executed in the next special chart special electricity control process.

On the other hand, in the special chart determination process, if it is determined that the result of the hit/miss judgment that triggered this game round is a big hit result or a small hit result, the opening time information (for example, 4 seconds) previously stored in the main ROM 65 is read out, and the opening time information is set in the special chart special electric timer counter. After that, an opening command is sent to the voice light emission control device 70. The opening command is a command for the voice light emission control device 70 to recognize that it is time to start the performance for the opening and closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode is one of various big hit results or small hit results. Therefore, the voice light emission control device 70 can execute the performance of the opening and closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode. After that, the value of the special chart special electric counter is added by 1, changing the value of the special chart special electric counter that was stored as "2" to "3", and the special chart determination process is terminated.

<Special call start processing>
Next, the special call start processing of step S709 in the special call control processing (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special call start process, it is determined whether the opening time in the current opening and closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, it is determined whether the trigger for the current opening and closing execution mode is a jackpot result. If it is determined that the trigger for the current opening and closing execution mode is a jackpot result, the round counter provided in the main RAM 66 is set to the value of the number of rounds of play corresponding to the current jackpot result, and the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 66 is set to 10. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of remaining rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode, and the winning counter PC is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify whether the upper limit number of game balls has won in one round game or one opening and closing number regulation mode. After that, a process of reading out the opening duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is a 5R high probability jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-time mode is read from the main ROM 65. The open duration is 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is other than a 5R high probability jackpot result, the open duration information corresponding to the long-time mode is read from the main ROM 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current trigger for the opening and closing execution mode is not the result of any big win, i.e., if the current trigger for the opening and closing execution mode is the result of a small win, the opening and closing counter provided in the main RAM 66 is set to 5, and the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 66 is set to 10. The opening and closing counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening and closing number specified mode of the opening and closing execution mode. After that, a process of reading the open duration corresponding to the small win result is executed. The open duration is pre-stored in the main ROM 65, and is specifically 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game balls (0.6 seconds).

When the opening duration read process described above is executed when it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result, or when the opening duration information described above is read when it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot result, the read opening duration information is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter, and an opening setting process is executed to set the special electricity winning device 32 in an open state. After that, an opening command is output. The opening command is a command for the sound and light emission control device 70 to recognize that the special electricity winning device 32 has been opened. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light emission control device 70 executes control to switch the performance during the opening/closing execution mode accordingly. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 to change the value of the special chart special electricity counter, which had been stored as "3," to "4," and the special electricity start process is terminated.

<Special call open processing>
Next, the special line open processing of step S710 in the special chart special line control processing (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special electric open processing, if the current opening/closing execution mode is the round number specified mode, it is determined whether the end condition of one round of play is met, and if the end condition is met, the special electric winning device 32 is closed and a close command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. It is also determined whether the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the close time is set in the special chart special electric timer counter. The close time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and specifically, it is 2 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. In addition, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the round counter value is "0". In this case, since the value of the special chart special electric counter is "4" when the special electric open processing is executed, it becomes "5" after adding 1.

If the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing number specified mode, if the open duration of the special electric winning device 32 has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is closed and a close command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. Then, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special chart special electric timer counter. As already explained, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Also, if the open duration has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the special electric winning device 32, and if a prize has been won, the winning counter is subtracted by 1. Then, if the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the opening/closing counter is cleared to "0" and the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Also, if the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the special chart special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the opening/closing counter is "0". In this case, the value of the special chart special call counter is "4" when the special call open process is executed, so after adding 1 it becomes "5."

<Special line shutdown processing>
Next, the special line closed processing of step S711 in the special chart special line control processing (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special line closed process, it is determined whether both the round counter and the open/close counter are "0". If either one is not "0", it is determined whether the close time has elapsed. If the close time has not elapsed, the special line closed process is terminated. If the close time has elapsed, the special line winning device 32 is opened, and the open duration corresponding to the winning result that triggered the execution of this open/close execution mode is set in the special chart special line timer counter. In addition, if the special line winning device 32 is opened, an open command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. After that, the special chart special line counter is decremented by 1, and then the special line closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special chart special line counter is "5" when the special line closed process is executed, it becomes "4" after decrementing by 1.

On the other hand, if both the round counter and the opening/closing counter are "0", an ending command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. The ending command is a command for making the sound and light emission control device 70 recognize that it is time to start the performance for the ending. The ending command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode was one of various big win results or small win results. Therefore, the sound and light emission control device 70 can execute the ending performance in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 seconds) pre-stored in the main ROM 65 is read, and the information of the ending time is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. After that, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, the value of the special chart special electricity counter when the special electricity closed process is executed is "5", so after incrementing by 1, it becomes "6".

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special call termination process of step S712 in the special call control process (Figure 32) will be described.

In the special call end process, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the game state transition process is executed, the special chart special call counter is cleared to "0", and the special call end process is terminated. Here, the game state transition process is explained.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode that has now ended is any of the 16R high probability jackpot result, 12R high probability jackpot result A, 8R high probability jackpot result, and 4R high probability jackpot result, the high probability flag and high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 66 are each set to "1", the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0", and the game state transition process ends. The high probability flag is a flag for specifying whether the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode in the main CPU 64, and the high frequency support flag is a flag for specifying whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode in the main CPU 64. In addition, the high frequency counter is a counter for specifying the end trigger of the high frequency support mode in the limited number of times high frequency support mode in the main CPU 64, and the value set in the high frequency counter is decremented by 1 each time a game round ends.

In addition, in a situation where the high probability flag is set to "0", the process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in the hit/miss judgment process of step S803 in the special chart change start process (Figure 33), and in a situation where the high probability flag is set to "1", the process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. In addition, in a situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "0", the process corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed in the normal chart normal power control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27), and in a situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "1", the process corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed. In addition, when the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, even if the value of the high frequency support flag is "0", the process corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed. However, in the opening and closing execution mode, the process corresponding to the low frequency support mode is executed regardless of whether the high frequency support flag is set to "1". Therefore, during the opening and closing execution mode, the low frequency support mode is executed regardless of whether the support mode immediately before is the high frequency support mode.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the currently ended open/close execution mode is either the 12R high probability jackpot result B or the 5R high probability jackpot result, it is determined whether the high frequency support flag is set to "1" or the value of the high frequency counter is "1" or more. If it is determined that the high frequency support flag is set to "1" or the value of the high frequency counter is "1" or more, this means that the 12R high probability jackpot result B or the 5R high probability jackpot result has occurred in the game state that is the high frequency support mode, so a process is executed to transition to the game state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 66 are each set to "1", the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66 is cleared to "0", and this game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high frequency support flag is not set to "1" and the value of the high frequency counter is not equal to or greater than "1", this means that a 12R high probability big win result B or a 5R high probability big win result has occurred in a game state that is a low frequency support mode, so processing is executed to set the game state to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode. Specifically, the high probability flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" and this game state transition processing is terminated.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the currently ended open/close execution mode was an 8R low probability jackpot result, the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "15", the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag are both cleared to "0", and the game state transition process ends. Therefore, if an 8R low probability jackpot result occurs, the game state transition process will be set to the high frequency support mode until 15 game rounds, which is the standard number of times for ending the open/close execution mode, are played.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the currently ended open/close execution mode is a 12R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag, high frequency support flag, and high frequency counter in the main RAM 66 are all cleared to "0," and the game state transition process ends.

In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the transition to the currently ended opening/closing execution mode was a small winning result, the post-small winning counter provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "30" and this game state transition process is terminated. The post-small winning counter is a counter that the main CPU 64 uses to determine whether or not the reference number of play times for post-small winning have already been played since the small winning result was obtained. The value of the post-small winning counter is decremented by 1 each time a play time is ended. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode is transitioned, the value of the post-small winning counter is cleared to "0". If the value of the post-small winning counter is 1 or more, the display duration for the play time is selected in a manner corresponding to the time after the small winning result.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The dimension of the lower play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is smaller than the dimension of the upper play between the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or other fraudulent tool into the lower play to electrically contact the terminals 111-116 and wiring patterns on the element mounting surface 61e, and also to prevent signals from being fraudulently manipulated by such fraudulent acts.

The fixed portions 111b, 113b-115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 extend between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b along the element mounting surface 61e. This allows the signal lines set in the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 to be protected preferentially from fraudulent acts using fraudulent tools such as wires.

The front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122 by screwing the front first case fixing boss 183 to the front third case fixing boss 185 to the rear first case fixing boss 186 to the rear third case fixing boss 188. When the front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122, the lower play that exists between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is smaller than the upper play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a. This makes it easy to maintain a state in which the lower play is smaller than the upper play.

When the front case body 121 is released from the state where it is fixed to the rear case body 122, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. In this state, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is larger than the lower play in the state where the front case body 121 is fixed to the rear case body 122. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 62, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 with the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. This makes it easier to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. After that, the lower play between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b can be made smaller than the upper play between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a.

Lock receiving portions 101h-104h are provided on the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Therefore, when the male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted into the receiving portions 101f-104f of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and connected, the male connectors are prevented from coming loose and this state can be maintained.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are located closer to the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 than the areas of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c that face the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. When the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the distance between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is greater than the dimension by which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h protrude from the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c toward the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b. This makes it easier to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 during the process of assembling the board box 62.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are located on the upright tip side (free end side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c, rather than the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h can prevent the insertion of a fraudulent tool from the front facing plate portion 141, which is located behind the main control board 61 in the pachinko machine 10, into the lower play to electrically contact the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. This will make the fraudulent activity even more difficult.

No locking receiving portion is provided on the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Since the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided only on the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c out of the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c, the play provided between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the peripheral portions of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 can be made smaller in order to allow the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to be inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, compared to a configuration in which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on both the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c. This makes it possible to reduce the play that exists between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the periphery of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159.

The lower partition wall 125 of the rear case body 122 is integrally formed with a second guide portion 182 that guides the front case body 121 upward as it slides toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171-174. The second guide portion 182 guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 so that the lower play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is smaller than the upper play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a. This makes it possible to easily create a state in which the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c with good reproducibility.

When a portion of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, there is a common vertical play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. For this reason, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide portion 182 with the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, variation in the play between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is prevented in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. This allows the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b-159b to be uniformly close to the connector group corresponding plate 155a.

The upper partition wall 124 of the rear case body 122 is provided with a first guide portion 181 that guides the front case body 121 downward as it slides toward the rear facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171-174. After the four position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted into the four corresponding boss insertion holes 175-178, the front case body 121 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171-174, thereby making it possible to achieve a state in which the seven connectors CN1-CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156-159, 164-166 without the need to finely adjust the position of the front case body 121 relative to the main control board 61. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 while the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are positioned in the center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction, so that the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be prevented from colliding with the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b, 164b to 166b of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166. This simplifies the task of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the process of assembling the main control device 60, thereby improving the efficiency of the task.

The connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front side opposing plate portion 141 towards the main control board 61. The side surface 155b of the connector group corresponding recess 155 stands up almost vertically from the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the direction opposite the main control board 61. This makes it difficult to insert a conductive tampering tool such as a wire into the gap between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

The fixing parts 113b, 114b of all the terminals 113, 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 extend so as to straddle the element mounting surface 61e between the lower standing wall parts 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral parts 157b, 158b. The second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 do not have any terminals whose fixing parts extend so as to straddle the element mounting surface 61e between the upper standing wall parts 102b, 103b and the upper peripheral parts 157a, 158a. Therefore, the signal lines set in all the terminals 113, 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 can be preferentially protected from fraudulent acts using fraudulent tools such as wires.

The signal line of the detection signal from the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is assigned to the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. This terminal 113 is given priority protection from tampering involving the approach of a conductive tampering tool. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of tampering signals to this signal line, thereby preventing the tampering of a situation in which a game ball has entered the first actuation port 33.

The signal line of the detection signal from the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is assigned to the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3. This terminal 114 is given priority protection from tampering involving the approach of a conductive tampering tool. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of tampering signals to this signal line, thereby preventing the tampering of a situation in which a game ball has entered the second actuation port 34.

A signal line for the detection signal in the radio wave detection sensor 202 is assigned to the 11th terminal, which is one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and a signal line for the detection signal in the magnetic detection sensor 203 is assigned to the 13th terminal, which is one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. These 11th and 13th terminals are preferentially protected from tampering involving the bringing of a conductive tampering tool into close proximity. This makes it possible to prevent tampering from creating a situation in which tampering with radio waves or magnetic fields cannot be detected.

A signal line is assigned to the 11th terminal, which is the terminal 111 at one end of the first connector CN1, for the main CPU 64 to receive various payout reception commands (payout limit command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body close command, full tank state command, full tank state release command, no ball state command, no ball state release command, payout abnormal state command, and payout abnormal state release command) from the payout CPU 222. The 13th terminal is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts such as bringing a conductive fraud tool close. This prevents the front door close command, main body close command, full tank state release command, no ball state release command, or payout abnormal state release command from being fraudulently sent to the open state of the front door frame 14, the open state of the gaming machine main body 12, the full tank state, the no ball state, or the payout abnormal state from being fraudulently released.

A signal line is assigned to the 13th terminal, which is one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, for the main CPU 64 to send various payout transmission commands (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command) to the payout CPU 222. The 15th terminal is given priority protection from fraudulent acts such as bringing a conductive fraud tool close to it. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent signals from being sent to the signal line, which would result in the fraudulent payout of game balls.

A signal line is assigned to the 19th terminal, which is one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, for the main CPU 64 to receive a prize ball permission signal from the payout CPU 222. The 19th terminal is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts such as bringing a conductive fraudulent tool close to it. This prevents a situation from being created in which a fraudulent act of sending a fraudulent signal to the signal line would result in the main CPU 64 fraudulently sending a prize ball command to the payout CPU 222 even if the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout RAM 224 is not "0".

When it is determined that the special power winning device 32 is in the open state when it is not in the open/close execution mode, a special power abnormality notification is made, and the process for progressing the game in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) (steps S208 to S219) is not executed. Also, when it is determined that the normal power role 34a is in the open state when the open state winning of the normal power role 34a has not occurred, a normal power abnormality notification is made, and the process for progressing the game in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) (steps S208 to S219) is not executed. The signal line for the main CPU 64 to transmit the special power drive signal to the special power drive unit 32c is assigned to the 12th terminal, which is the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. Also, the signal line for the main CPU 64 to transmit the normal power drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34c is assigned to the 14th terminal, which is the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. In the fourth connector CN4, the one-end terminal 115 is given priority over the other-end terminal 116 in protection from fraudulent acts such as bringing a conductive fraud tool into close proximity. The signal lines (signal lines for the special power drive signal and the normal power drive signal) that can detect the occurrence of fraudulent acts by abnormality notifications (special power abnormality notifications and normal power abnormality notifications) are arranged in the other-end terminals 116 (specifically, the 12th and 14th terminals) rather than the one-end terminals 115 of the fourth connector CN4. This allows the manager of the game hall to discover and respond to fraudulent acts that fraudulently open the special power winning device 32 and fraudulently open the normal power role 34a, while allowing the manager of the game hall to assign a signal line for transmitting or receiving other information to the one-end terminal 115 that is given priority in protection from fraudulent acts in the fourth connector CN4.

<Alternative to the First Embodiment>
The fixing parts 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be in contact with the connector group corresponding plate part 155a. This can reduce the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate part 155a. This can prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire through the upper play existing between the upper upright walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral parts 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 to contact the fixing parts 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4.

- The front case body 121 may be fixed to the rear case body 122 in a state in which the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 abut against the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. In this configuration, the second guide portion 182 guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61 until the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c abut against the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b. In this way, by having the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower periphery 156b-159b in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower periphery 156b-159b.

Instead of a configuration in which the rear case body 122 is provided with a second guide portion 182 that contacts the front case body 121 to guide the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61, the front case body 121 may be provided with a second guide portion that contacts the main control board 61 fixed to the rear case body 122 to guide the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61. Specifically, a second guide portion is integrally formed on the lower part of the front side opposing plate portion 141 of the front case body 121, protruding toward the main control board 61. The second guide portion has a guide surface that contacts the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61 after the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in a process in which the front case body 121 is slid toward the rear case body 123 with the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. The guide surface is inclined downward in the direction from the front case body 141 to the rear case body 123 (leftward in FIG. 17(a)). When the front case body 121 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 in contact with the guide surface, the front case body 121 is guided upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61, and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 approach the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

In this way, even if the front case body 121 is provided with a second guide portion that contacts the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 and the main control board 61, the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 can be made smaller than the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control device 230 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from that of the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

The configuration of the main control unit 230 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 34 to 38. Figure 34(a) is a front view of the main control unit 230 in this embodiment, Figure 34(b) is a front view of the main control unit 230 showing an enlarged view of the fifth connector CN5, Figure 34(c) is a front view of the main control unit 230 showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector CN6, and Figure 34(d) is a front view of the main control unit 230 showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector CN7. Figure 35 is an exploded oblique view of the main control unit 230 as viewed from the front side, and Figure 36 is an exploded oblique view of the main control unit 230 as viewed from the rear side. Also, Figure 37(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, Figure 37(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2, Figure 37(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3, and Figure 37(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Figure 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the main control device 230 includes a board box 231 that houses the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 35, the board box 231 includes a front case body 232 that covers the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, a connector cover 233 that is sandwiched between the main control board 61 and the front case body 232 and surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and a back case body 234 that covers the board back surface 61f (FIG. 36), which is the plate surface opposite the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The front case body 232, the connector cover 233, and the back case body 234 are made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. This makes it possible to visually check the element mounting surface 61e and the board back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 231 from the outside of the board box 231. The material from which the front case body 232, the connector cover 233, and the back case body 234 are made is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, but may be transparent acrylic resin or even colored transparent.

As shown in FIG. 35, the rear case body 234 has a rear-side facing plate portion 235 formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and approximately plate-like facing the board back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61. The rear-side facing plate portion 235 has a board facing surface 235a facing the main control board 61. The rear-side facing plate portion 235 is integrally formed with a pair of upper and lower partition walls 236 and 237, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 235a protruding toward the main control board 61. In addition, the rear-side facing plate portion 235 is integrally formed with a left first partition wall 238 and a left second partition wall 239, with the upper and lower parts of the left short side of the board facing surface 235a protruding toward the main control board 61, and a right first partition wall 241 and a right second partition wall 242, with the upper and lower parts of the right short side of the board facing surface 235a protruding toward the main control board 61. The rear case body 234 is provided with a rear storage section 243 that can store a portion of the rear side of the front case body 232 using the rear facing plate portion 235 and the partition walls 236-239, 241, and 242.

Cylindrical board fixing bosses 244-247 used to fix the main control board 61 to the rear case body 234 are integrally formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the board facing surface 235a of the rear facing plate portion 235. The board fixing bosses 244-247 protrude from the board facing surface 235a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes (not shown) are formed at the free ends of the board fixing bosses 244-247 to enable the main control board 61 to be screwed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, board fixing through holes 251-254 are formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the main control board 61 to enable the main control board 61 to be screwed to the board fixing bosses 244-247. These four board fixing through holes 251-254 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four board fixing bosses 244-247 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the rear case body 234 by screwing it from the element mounting surface 61e side to the board fixing bosses 244 to 247. This makes the main control board 61 integrated with the rear case body 234. In this state, the board back surface 61f (Figure 36) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 235a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-to-back direction).

As shown in FIG. 35, the front case body 232 has a horizontally long rectangular front side facing plate portion 261 that faces the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, sandwiching the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in FIG. 36, the front side facing plate portion 261 has an element facing surface 261a that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35). The front side facing plate portion 261 has a pair of upper and lower upright walls 262 and 263 integrally formed by raising the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 261a toward the rear side (rear case body 234 side), and a pair of left and right upright walls 264 and 265 integrally formed by raising the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 261a toward the rear side (rear case body 234 side). The upper and lower standing walls 262 and 263 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left and right standing walls 264 and 265 face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. The front case body 232 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped board housing section 266 that is open to the rear side by the front facing plate section 261 and the standing walls 262 to 265, and is capable of housing the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 35, a connector group corresponding recess 267 for exposing the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 34(a)) on the surface of the main control device 230 is formed in the front facing plate portion 261 at a position facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61. The connector group corresponding recess 267 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 261 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 34(a), the connector group corresponding recess 267 is provided at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 267 with a horizontally long rectangular connector group corresponding plate portion 267a that faces substantially the entire element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35) of the main control board 61 with the connector cover 233 in between. As shown in FIG. 37(a), (b) and FIG. 38(a), (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a abuts against the connector cover 233.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a is formed with a first connector insertion hole 271, a second connector insertion hole 272, a third connector insertion hole 273, and a fourth connector insertion hole 274, which penetrate the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the plate thickness direction and through which the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4 are inserted. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 are horizontally elongated rectangular through holes.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the connector cover 233.

As shown in Figures 35 and 36, the connector cover 233 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate. The connector cover 233 is formed with a first cover side insertion hole 275, a second cover side insertion hole 276, a third cover side insertion hole 277, and a fourth cover side insertion hole 278 that correspond one-to-one to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (Figure 34(a)) mounted on the main control board 61 and allow these first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to be inserted therethrough. These first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are through holes formed by penetrating the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 36, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the rear surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. A pair of left and right cover position adjustment bosses 281, 282 are integrally formed on the rear surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a to prevent the connector cover 233 from shifting from the fixed position relative to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The cover position adjustment bosses 281, 282 protrude from the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a to the rear surface side (main control board 61 side).

A pair of left and right cover position adjustment holes 283, 284 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the connector cover 233, through which the cover position adjustment bosses 281, 282 can be inserted. The cover position adjustment holes 283, 284 are through holes that penetrate the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction. One plate surface of the connector cover 233 is an adhesive surface to which an adhesive is applied for fixing the connector cover 233 to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232 by being attached to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a from the back side of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a so that the cover position adjustment holes 283, 284 are inserted into the cover position adjustment bosses 281, 282.

As shown in Figures 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), the first cover side through hole 275 is a through hole corresponding to the first connector through hole 271, the second cover side through hole 276 is a through hole corresponding to the second connector through hole 272, the third cover side through hole 277 is a through hole corresponding to the third connector through hole 273, and the fourth cover side through hole 278 is a through hole corresponding to the fourth connector through hole 274. The first to fourth cover side through holes 275-278 are formed slightly smaller than the corresponding connector through holes 271-274. The opening areas of the first to fourth cover side through holes 275-278 are narrower than the opening areas of the corresponding connector through holes 271-274. The vertical dimension from the upper periphery 275a-278a to the lower periphery 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper periphery 271a-274a to the lower periphery 271b-274b of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271-274.

When the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232 (Fig. 36), the first to fourth cover side through-holes 275 to 278 are in communication with the corresponding connector through-holes 271 to 274. The upper peripheral portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side through-holes 275 to 278 are positioned lower than the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the corresponding connector through-holes 271 to 274, and the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side through-holes 275 to 278 are positioned higher than the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the corresponding connector through-holes 271 to 274. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted through both the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and are exposed on the surface of the main control device 230, and are capable of receiving male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 275a-278a to the lower peripheral portion 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is set to be approximately 0.8 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 to the lower end of the locking receiving portion 101h-104h. This makes it possible to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 into the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is set to be approximately 1.8 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 to the lower end of the lower standing wall portion 101c-104c. Therefore, when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding first to fourth cover side through holes 275 to 278, a total play of approximately 1.8 mm is created between the upper upright walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side through holes 275 to 278, and between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side through holes 275 to 278.

The connector cover 233 is located in an area facing the connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 35) on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted. As shown in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), the connector cover 233 faces the element mounting surface 61e at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance of approximately 1.5 mm) in the front-to-rear direction (the left-to-right direction in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b)). Between the main control board 61 and the connector cover 233 are the fixing parts 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. There is some play between these fixing parts 111b to 116b and the connector cover 233.

The connector cover 233 is a member smaller than the front case body 232. The error in the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portions 275a-278a to the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 that may occur when the connector cover 233 is resin molded is smaller than the error in the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portions 271a-274a to the lower peripheral portions 271b-274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 that may occur when the front case body 232 is resin molded. By setting the vertical dimension of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 formed in the connector cover 233, which is a member smaller than the front case body 232, smaller than the vertical dimension of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 formed in the front case body 232, it is possible to reduce the play around the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 while still allowing the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 to be inserted into the corresponding first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 and first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 even if an error occurs during resin molding.

The front case body 232, which covers most of the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61, and the connector cover 233 in which the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are formed are separate members, so that it is possible to use the front case body 232 having a common shape for multiple models that have different types and arrangements of connectors mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61, while making it possible to select the connector cover 233 for each model according to the type and arrangement of connectors mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 285-287 for exposing the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 on the surface of the main control device 230 are formed in the front facing plate portion 261 at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a-87a of the main control board 61, and fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291-293 are formed in the fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate portions 285a-287a of these fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 285-287 to allow the corresponding connectors CN5-CN7 to be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), position adjustment bosses 294-297 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 261a of the front facing plate portion 261, and boss insertion holes 301-304 are provided at the four corners of the main control board 61. As in the first embodiment, the front case body 232 is guided by the position adjustment bosses 294-297 so that the position adjustment bosses 294-297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301-304, and then slid toward the rear case body 234.

Figure 39 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit 230 when cut along a cutting plane (line E-E in Figure 34 (a)) passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6. As shown in Figure 39, a first guide portion 305 that guides the front case body 232 downward is provided on the upper partition wall 236 of the rear case body 234. The first guide portion 305 guides the front case body 232 that comes into contact with the first guide portion 305 downward by approximately 0.7 mm in the process of sliding towards the rear opposing plate portion 235 with the position adjustment bosses 294-297 inserted into the boss insertion holes 301-304. As in the first embodiment, after the position adjustment bosses 294-297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301-304, the front case body 232 is guided downward by the first guide portion 305, so that the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are positioned at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271-274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275-278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 are positioned at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 291-293. Then, the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 271-274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275-278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 291-293.

39, the lower partition wall 237 of the rear case body 234 is provided with a second guide portion 306 that guides the front case body 232 upward after it has been guided downward by the first guide portion 305. The second guide portion 306 guides the front case body 232 that comes into contact with the second guide portion 306 upward by approximately 0.7 mm. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the connector cover 233 is guided upward following the front case body 232. As the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 and the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are brought into close proximity, as shown in Figures 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b). This reduces the possibility that a tampering tool will be inserted between the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b and the lower standing walls 101c-104c.

When the front case body 232 is fixed to the rear case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 sandwiched therebetween, as shown in Figure 37 (a), the fixing portion 111b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1 extends downward from a position lower than the center in the short direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the lower upright wall portion 101c) and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 271b of the first connector insertion hole 271, and between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 275b of the first cover side insertion hole 275. In addition, the fixed portion 112b of the other end terminal 112 extends upward from a position above the center in the short direction of the first housing 101 (near the upper upright wall portion 101b), and extends between the upper upright wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 271a of the first connector insertion hole 271, and between the upper upright wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 275a of the first cover side insertion hole 275, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figure 37 (b), the fixing portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from a central position in the short direction of the second housing 102 and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 272b of the second connector insertion hole 272, and between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 276b of the second cover side insertion hole 276. As shown in FIG. 38(a), the fixing portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from a central position in the short direction of the third housing 103, and extends between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral portion 273b of the third connector insertion hole 273, and between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral portion 277b of the third cover side insertion hole 277, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the fixing portion 115b at one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector extends downward from a position lower than the center in the short direction of the fourth housing 104 (closer to the lower upright wall portion 104c) and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 274b of the fourth connector insertion hole 274, and between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 278b of the fourth cover side insertion hole 278. In addition, the fixed portion 116b of the other end terminal 116 extends upward from a position above the center in the short direction of the fourth housing 104 (near the upper upright wall portion 104b), and extends between the upper upright wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 274a of the fourth connector insertion hole 274, and between the upper upright wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 278a of the fourth cover side insertion hole 278, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

When the front case body 232 is fixed to the rear case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 sandwiched between them, as shown in Figures 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is smaller than the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 275a-278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278. This prevents fraudulent activity of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into the gap that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275-278.

The dimension of the play between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is preferably 0.8 mm or less, and more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By making the dimension of the play 0.8 mm or less, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire through the play and contacting the fixed portions 111b, 113b-115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. By making the dimension of the play 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert a fraud tool into the play, and the effect of preventing the fraudulent act can be improved.

The play between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheries 275a-278a of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275-278 is smaller than the play between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b and the upper peripheries 271a-274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent acts being committed by inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheries 271a-274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274.

As shown in Figures 37(a) and (b) and Figures 38(a) and (b), around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a is present at the rear of the connector cover 233 (to the right in Figures 37(a) and (b) and Figures 38(a) and (b)). For this reason, when an attempt is made to insert a tampering tool such as a wire through the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 275a-278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278, and through the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278, the insertion angle of the tampering tool is limited by the presence of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. In this way, by configuring the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a to be present behind the connector cover 233 around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, even if the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 formed in the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a are larger than the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent tool due to the vertical play of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 that exists between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector cover 233.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Between the main control board 61 and the front case body 232, a connector cover 233 is provided that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is smaller than the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. Therefore, the connector cover 233 can narrow the area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 231 through the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. This reduces the possibility that a conductive tampering tool such as a wire will reach the terminals 111-116 and wiring patterns on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 when a tampering attempt is made by inserting a conductive tampering tool into the gap between the upper upright walls 101b-104b and the upper peripheries 271a-274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274. This prevents the tampering attempt of manipulating signals using a conductive tampering tool.

The connector cover 233 is located between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the fixed portions 111b-116b of the terminals 111-116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Because the connector cover 233 is located closer to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a than the fixed portions 111b-116b, the connector cover 233 can prevent a tampering tool from coming into contact with the fixed portions 111b-116b. Because the connector cover 233 is located closer to the main control board 61 than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a, the connector cover 233 can be prevented from being tampered with.

The opening area of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 formed in the connector cover 233 is smaller than the opening area of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 formed in the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the connector cover 233 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted only through the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-276, the area of the area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 231 around the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 can be reduced. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud tool is electrically contacted with the area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 231.

A second guide portion 306 is integrally formed on the lower partition wall 237 of the rear case body 234 to guide the front case body 232 upward as it slides toward the rear facing plate portion 235 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 294-297. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the connector cover 233 is guided upward following the front case body 232, so that the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 and the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are in close proximity to each other. This reduces the possibility that a tampering tool will be inserted between the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b and the lower standing walls 101c-104c.

<Alternative to the second embodiment>
A predetermined play (specifically, about 1 mm of play) may be provided between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the connector cover 233. This makes it possible to extend the distance from the fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent activity in which a conductive fraud tool such as a wire is inserted into the upper play existing from the front case body 232 side between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, or into the lower play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, and makes contact with the fixed portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

- The connector cover 233 may be configured to bend easily when it comes into contact with the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Specifically, the connector cover 233 is formed of a colorless and transparent polyethylene resin. The material forming the connector cover 233 is not limited to a colorless and transparent polyethylene resin, and may be a colorless and transparent urethane resin, or may be colored and transparent. As already described in the second embodiment, the front case body 232 is formed of a polycarbonate resin. The plate thickness of the connector cover 233 is approximately 0.5 mm, which is thinner than the plate thickness (approximately 1 mm) of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the front case body 232. The connector cover 233 has higher flexibility than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. With the position adjustment bosses inserted into the boss insertion holes, if the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 come into contact with the peripheral portions 275a to 278a, 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233 when the front case body 232 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 235, the connector cover 233 is pushed by the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and bends, allowing the front case body 232 to continue sliding toward the rear case body 234.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the connector cover 233 is easily deformable, the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 275a-278a to the lower peripheral portion 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 can be set small while preventing a decrease in the assembly efficiency of the main control device 60. This makes it possible to set small the play that exists between the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portion 275a-278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278, and the play that exists between the lower standing wall portion 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portion 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278.

Except for the portions that protrude into the inside of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, the surface of the connector cover 233 is covered by the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. This reduces the possibility that the connector cover 233 present between the housings 101 to 104 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 will be turned over and a tampering tool will be inserted through the turned over portion.

The front case body 232 may be fixed to the rear case body 234 in a state in which the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 abut against the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278. In this configuration, the second guide portion 306 guides the front case body 232 and connector cover 233 upward relative to the rear case body 234 and main control board 61 until the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c abut against the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b. In this way, by having the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower periphery 275b-278b in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower periphery 275b-278b.

Instead of a configuration in which the second guide portion 306 is provided on the rear case body 234 to guide the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward relative to the rear case body 234 and the main control board 61 by contacting the front case body 232, a configuration in which a second guide portion is provided on the front case body 232 to guide the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward relative to the rear case body 234 and the main control board 61 by contacting the main control board 61 fixed to the rear case body 234 may be used.

Specifically, a second guide portion is integrally formed on the lower part of the front-side facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232, protruding from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61. In the process in which the front case body 232 is slid toward the rear-side facing plate portion 235 with the position adjustment bosses 294-297 inserted into the boss insertion holes 301-304, the second guide portion has a guide surface that contacts the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 232 upward relative to the rear case body 234 and the main control board 61 after the first to seventh connectors CN1-CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 271-274, 291-293. The guide surface is inclined downward from the front-side facing plate portion 261 toward the rear-side facing plate portion 235 (leftward in FIG. 39). When the front case body 232 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 235 while the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 is in contact with the guide surface, the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward relative to the rear case body 234 and the main control board 61, and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 approach the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

In this way, even if the front case body 232 is provided with a second guide portion that contacts the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 232 and connector cover 233 upward relative to the rear case body 234 and main control board 61, it is possible to reduce the play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control device 310 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The configuration of the main control device 310 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 40 to 44. Figure 40(a) is a front view of the main control device 310 in this embodiment, Figure 40(b) is a front view of the main control device 310 enlarging the periphery of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, Figure 41 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 310 seen from the front side, and Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 310 seen from the rear side. Also, Figure 43(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, Figure 43(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2, Figure 44(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3, and Figure 44(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Figure 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the main control device 310 includes the main control board 61 already described in the first embodiment above, and a board box 311 that houses the main control board 61. As in the first embodiment, the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)), the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements (resistor 91, capacitor 92, transistor 93, IC 94 (FIG. 9(a)), etc.) are mounted on one side of the board surface of the main control board 61, and this side of the board surface serves as the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41).

As shown in Figures 41 and 42, the board box 311 includes a front case body 312 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (Figure 41) of the main control board 61, a back case body 313 that covers the board back surface 61f (Figure 42), which is the plate surface on the opposite side of the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, and a connector corresponding plate 314 that is fixed to the main control board 61 and surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The connector corresponding plate 314 is located between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312. The front case body 312, the back case body 313, and the connector corresponding plate 314 are made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. This makes it possible to visually check the element mounting surface 61e and the board back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 311 from outside the board box 311. The material from which the front case body 312, the back case body 313, and the connector corresponding plate 314 are made is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, but may be transparent acrylic resin or even colored transparent.

As shown in FIG. 41, the rear case body 313 has a rear-side facing plate portion 315 formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and approximately plate-like facing the board back surface 61f (FIG. 42) of the main control board 61. The rear-side facing plate portion 315 has a board facing surface 315a facing the main control board 61. The rear-side facing plate portion 315 is integrally formed with a pair of upper and lower partition walls 316 and 317, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 315a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. In addition, the rear-side facing plate portion 315 is integrally formed with a left first partition wall 318 and a left second partition wall 319, with the upper and lower parts of the left short side of the board facing surface 315a protruding toward the main control board 61 side, and a right first partition wall 321 and a right second partition wall 322, with the upper and lower parts of the right short side of the board facing surface 315a protruding toward the main control board 61 side.

The upper partition wall 316 and the lower partition wall 317 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The first left partition wall 318 and the second left partition wall 319 face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction, and the first right partition wall 321 and the second right partition wall 322 face each other at a predetermined interval. The rear case body 313 is provided with a rear storage section 323 that can store a part of the rear side of the front case body 312 by the rear facing plate portion 315 and these partition walls 316-319, 321, 322.

Cylindrical board fixing bosses 324-327 used to fix the main control board 61 to the rear case body 313 are integrally formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the board facing surface 315a of the rear facing plate portion 315. The board fixing bosses 324-327 protrude from the board facing surface 315a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes (not shown) are formed at the free ends of the board fixing bosses 324-327 to enable the main control board 61 to be screwed. In addition, board fixing through holes 331-334 are formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right and upper right of the main control board 61 in a front view, allowing the main control board 61 to be screwed to the board fixing bosses 324-327. These four board fixing through holes 331-334 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four board fixing bosses 324-327 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the rear case body 313 by screwing it from the element mounting surface 61e side to the board fixing bosses 324 to 327. This makes the main control board 61 integrated with the rear case body 313. In this state, the board back surface 61f (Figure 42) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 315a at a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

Next, the configuration of the connector-compatible plate 314 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the connector corresponding plate 314 has a plate-shaped portion 335 formed in a horizontally long rectangle. The plate-shaped portion 335 is formed with a first plate-side through-hole 336 through which the first connector CN1 (FIG. 40(a)) mounted on the main control board 61 can be inserted, a second plate-side through-hole 337 through which the second connector CN2 (FIG. 40(a)) can be inserted, a third plate-side through-hole 338 through which the third connector CN3 (FIG. 40(a)) can be inserted, and a fourth plate-side through-hole 339 through which the fourth connector CN4 (FIG. 40(a)) can be inserted. These first to fourth plate-side through-holes 336 to 339 are horizontally long rectangular through-holes.

As shown in FIG. 42, the plate-shaped portion 335 is integrally formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the plate-shaped portion 335 with a pair of left and right plate fixing bosses 341, 342 for screwing the connector corresponding plate 314 to the main control board 61, and is integrally formed with a pair of left and right plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 for preventing deviation of the fixed position of the connector corresponding plate 314 relative to the main control board 61. The plate fixing bosses 341, 342 and the plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 protrude toward the main control board 61, and the protruding ends of the plate fixing bosses 341, 342 are formed with screw holes (not shown) for screwing the connector corresponding plate 314.

As shown in FIG. 41, at both ends of the main control board 61 in the longitudinal direction of the connector group mounting area 88, a pair of plate fixing holes 345, 346 are formed on the left and right sides through which screws 349 for fixing the connector corresponding plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted, and plate position adjustment holes 347, 348 are formed through which the free ends of the plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 (FIG. 42) extending from the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 can be inserted. These plate fixing holes 345, 346 and plate position adjustment holes 347, 348 are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 42, the protruding dimension of the plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 is larger than the protruding dimension of the plate fixing bosses 341, 342. After the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336-339, the connector corresponding plate 314 is in a state in which the two plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 are inserted into the two corresponding plate position adjustment holes 347, 348. By inserting the two plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 into the two corresponding plate position adjustment holes 347, 348, the fixing position of the connector corresponding plate 314 to the main control board 61 is determined. After that, the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61 by screwing the plate fixing bosses 341, 342 to the main control board 61 from the back side of the main control board 61.

The connector corresponding plate 314 covers almost the entire connector group mounting area 88 (Fig. 41) on which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (Fig. 40(a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e (Fig. 41). As shown in Figs. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), the connector corresponding plate 314 faces the element mounting surface 61e at a predetermined distance (specifically, a distance of about 1.5 mm) in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in Figs. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b)). Between the main control board 61 and the connector corresponding plate 314 are the fixing parts 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. There is some play between these fixing parts 111b to 116b and the connector corresponding plate 314.

As shown in Figures 43(a) and (b) and Figures 44(a) and (b), when the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located near the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. When the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, there is a play of approximately 1 mm between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339, and between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 336b to 339b of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339.

Next, the configuration of the front case body 312 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the front case body 312 has a horizontally long rectangular front side facing plate portion 351 that faces the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, sandwiching the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in FIG. 42, the front side facing plate portion 351 has an element facing surface 351a that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41). The front side facing plate portion 351 has a pair of upper and lower upright walls 352 and 353 integrally formed by raising the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 351a toward the rear side (rear case body 313 side), and a pair of left and right upright walls 354 and 355 integrally formed by raising the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 351a toward the rear side (rear case body 313 side). The upper and lower standing walls 352 and 353 face each other at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the left and right standing walls 354 and 355 face each other at a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction. The front case body 312 is provided with a front facing plate portion 351 and a board accommodation portion 356 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is open to the rear side by the standing walls 352 to 355, and is capable of accommodating the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 41, a connector group corresponding recess 361 for exposing the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 40(a)) on the surface of the main control device 310 is formed in the front facing plate portion 351 at a position facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61. The connector group corresponding recess 361 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 351 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 40(a), the connector group corresponding recess 361 has a horizontally elongated rectangular connector group corresponding plate portion 361a at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 361 that faces the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41) of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figure 40 (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a is formed with a first front side connector insertion hole 362, a second front side connector insertion hole 363, a third front side connector insertion hole 364 and a fourth front side connector insertion hole 365, through which the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3 and the fourth connector CN4 are inserted, penetrating the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the plate thickness direction. These first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are horizontally elongated rectangular through holes. In this embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted through the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312 and the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314, so that they are exposed on the surface of the main control device 310 and can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in Fig. 41, fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 371 to 373 for exposing the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 on the surface of the main control device 310 are formed in the front facing plate portion 351 at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61. As shown in Fig. 40(a), the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 371 to 373 are provided with horizontally elongated fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate portions 371a to 373a at the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 371 to 373 that face the element mounting surface 61e (Fig. 41) of the main control board 61, and the fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate portions 371a to 373a are formed with fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376 through which the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted. As in the first embodiment, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed on the surface of the main control device 310 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 374 to 376, and are capable of receiving male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7.

As shown in Figures 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), the vertical dimension from the upper periphery 362a-365a to the lower periphery 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 is set to be approximately 3 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b to the lower end of the locking receiving portion 101h-104h in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362-365. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 is approximately 4 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portion 101b-104b to the lower end of the lower standing wall portion 101c-104c in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Therefore, when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362 to 365, a total play of approximately 4 mm is created between the upper upright walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365, and between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365.

The first to fourth plate side through holes 336 to 339 are formed slightly smaller than the first to fourth front side connector through holes 362 to 365 that correspond to the first to fourth plate side through holes 336 to 339. The opening areas of the first to fourth plate side through holes 336 to 339 are narrower than the corresponding first to fourth front side connector through holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 336a to the lower peripheral portion 336b of the first plate side insertion hole 336 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 362a to the lower peripheral portion 362b of the first front side connector insertion hole 362, and the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 337a to the lower peripheral portion 337b of the second plate side insertion hole 337 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral portion 363a to the lower peripheral portion 363b of the second front side connector insertion hole 363. The vertical dimension from the upper periphery 338a to the lower periphery 338b of the third plate side insertion hole 338 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper periphery 364a to the lower periphery 364b of the third front side connector insertion hole 364, and the vertical dimension from the upper periphery 339a to the lower periphery 339b of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper periphery 365a to the lower periphery 365b of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365.

The connector corresponding plate 314 is a part that surrounds the periphery of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and is a small part compared to the front case body 312 that covers most of the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. The work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 to fix the connector corresponding plate 314 to the main control board 61 is easier than the work of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted on the main control board 61 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376. For this reason, the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314 can be insertion holes that are one size smaller than the front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312. By using the connector-compatible plate 314, it is possible to prevent the assembly process from becoming too complicated, while also preventing the play present above the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from becoming too large.

As shown in FIG. 42, position adjustment bosses 381-384 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 351a of the front facing plate portion 351, as in the first embodiment. Also, as shown in FIG. 40(a), boss insertion holes 385-388 are provided at the four corners of the main control board 61. The boss insertion holes 385-388 are long holes that extend vertically along the short sides 61c, 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the boss insertion holes 385-388 is set to be approximately 4 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment bosses 381-384 so that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 4 mm in the vertical direction when the position adjustment bosses 381-384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385-388.

In the process of assembling the main control device 310, as already explained, the main control board 61 is screwed to the rear case body 313. Then, the connector corresponding plate 314 is screwed to the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61. Then, the position adjustment bosses 381-384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385-388 of the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted into the corresponding first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5-CN7 are inserted into the corresponding fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374-376. Then, the front case body 312 is slid toward the rear facing plate portion 315 until the free ends of the position adjustment bosses 381-384 abut against the rear facing plate portion 315.

Then, the front case body 312 is slid upward by approximately 2 mm until the position adjustment bosses 381-384 come into contact with the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385-388 and the front case body 312 cannot be slid upward any further. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 385-388 have a vertical dimension that allows the front case body 312 to move upward by approximately 2 mm when the position adjustment bosses 381-384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385-388.

When the front case body 312 has been completely slid upward, the lower periphery 362b-365b of the front connector insertion holes 362-365 is in a state of being close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 at a predetermined distance. The lower play between the lower periphery 362b-365b of the front connector insertion holes 362-365 and the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c is preferably 0.8 mm or less, and more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By making the lower play 0.8 mm or less, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a conductive tampering tool such as a wire will be inserted through the lower play, and by making the lower play 0.5 mm or less, it is possible to further reduce the possibility.

Then, with the front case body 312 having completed sliding upward and the position adjustment bosses 381-384 positioned at the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385-388, the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 are screwed together. With the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 screwed together, the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted into both the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336-339 and the corresponding front side connector insertion holes 362-365, and are exposed on the surface of the main control device 310, and are capable of receiving male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. In this state, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a of the front case body 312 abuts against the plate portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314.

45(a) is a front view of the front case body 312, and FIG. 45(b) is a front view of the rear case body 313. As shown in FIG. 45(a), the left standing wall 354 has a front first case fixing boss 391 integrally formed at the end of the left standing wall 354, and the right standing wall 355 has a front second case fixing boss 392 and a front third case fixing boss 393 integrally formed at the end of the right standing wall 355. The front first case fixing boss 391 is provided at approximately the center of the left standing wall 354 in the vertical direction and protrudes to the left from the left standing wall 354. The front second case fixing boss 392 and the front third case fixing boss 393 are provided at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction and protrude to the right from the right standing wall 355. These case fixing bosses 391 to 393 have through holes 391a to 393a through which screws 389 (Figure 41) are inserted to fix the front case body 312 to the rear case body 313.

As shown in FIG. 45B, the rear facing plate portion 315 of the rear case body 313 has a rear first case fixing boss 394 integrally formed on the left short side of the rear facing plate portion 315, and a rear second case fixing boss 395 and a rear third case fixing boss 396 integrally formed on the right short side of the rear facing plate portion 315. The rear first case fixing boss 394 corresponds to the front first case fixing boss 391, the rear second case fixing boss 395 corresponds to the front second case fixing boss 392, and the rear third case fixing boss 396 corresponds to the front third case fixing boss 393. The rear first case fixing boss 394 is provided at a position between the left first partition wall 318 and the left second partition wall 319 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the rear facing plate portion 315. Additionally, the rear second case fixing boss 395 and the rear third case fixing boss 396 are provided at a predetermined interval between the right first partition wall 321 and the right second partition wall 322 in the vertical direction, and protrude to the right from the rear opposing plate portion 315. These case fixing bosses 394 to 396 have screw holes 394a to 396a formed therein to enable the front case body 312 to be fixed with screws.

46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole 391a formed in the front first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a formed in the rear first case fixing boss 394 before the front case body 312 is slid upward, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole 391a formed in the front first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a formed in the rear first case fixing boss 394 after the front case body 312 is slid upward. Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the through hole 391a of the front first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a of the rear first case fixing boss 394 are vertically misaligned. Although not shown in the figures, the through holes 392a, 393a (FIG. 45(a)) of the front-side second case fixing boss 392 and the front-side third case fixing boss 393 are vertically misaligned with the screw holes 395a, 396a (FIG. 45(b)) of the rear-side second case fixing boss 395 and the rear-side third case fixing boss 396. For this reason, they cannot be fixed with screws as they are.

After the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the misalignment between the through hole 391a of the front first case fixing boss 391 and the screw hole 394a of the rear first case fixing boss 394 is eliminated, and the through hole 391a and the screw hole 394a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, the through holes 392a, 393a (FIG. 45(a)) of the front second case fixing boss 392 and the front third case fixing boss 393 are in communication with the screw holes 395a, 396a (FIG. 45(b)) of the rear second case fixing boss 395 and the rear third case fixing boss 396. This makes it possible to screw the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 together. Because the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 cannot be fixed with screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, it is possible to prevent the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 from being fixed together when the front case body 312 has not been slid upward or when the sliding has only been completed halfway.

When the front case body 312 is fixed to the rear case body 313 with the connector corresponding plate 314 and the main control board 61 sandwiched therebetween, as shown in Figure 43 (a), the fixing portion 111b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1 extends downward from a position lower than the center in the short direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the lower upright wall portion 101c) and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 362b of the first front connector insertion hole 362, and between the lower upright wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral portion 336b of the first plate side insertion hole 336. In addition, the fixed portion 112b of the other end terminal 112 extends upward from a position (closer to the upper upright wall portion 101b) above the center in the short direction of the first housing 101, and extends between the upper upright wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 362a of the first front connector insertion hole 362, and between the upper upright wall portion 101b and the upper peripheral portion 336a of the first plate side insertion hole 336, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figure 43 (b), the fixing portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from a central position in the short direction of the second housing 102 and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 363b of the second front connector insertion hole 363, and between the lower upright wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral portion 337b of the second plate side insertion hole 337. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the fixing portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from the center position in the short direction of the third housing 103, and extends between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral portion 364b of the third front connector insertion hole 364, and between the lower upright wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral portion 338b of the third plate side insertion hole 338, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figure 44 (b), the fixing portion 115b of one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 extends downward from a position lower than the center in the short direction of the fourth housing 104 (closer to the lower upright wall portion 104c) and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 365b of the fourth front connector insertion hole 365, and between the lower upright wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral portion 339b of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339. In addition, the fixed portion 116b of the other end terminal 116 extends upward from a position above the center in the short direction of the fourth housing 104 (near the upper upright wall portion 104b), and extends between the upper upright wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 365a of the fourth front connector insertion hole 365, and between the upper upright wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral portion 339a of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339, along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in Figures 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), the size of the play between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the plate-side insertion holes 336 to 339 is smaller than the size of the play between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the front-side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. As already explained, since the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, even if the front case body 312 (Figure 42) is slid upward, the connector corresponding plate 314 does not follow the front case body 312, and the upward sliding of the front case body 312 does not widen the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a. This reduces the possibility of a conductive tampering tool such as a wire being inserted between the upper upright walls 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper periphery 336a-339a of the plate-side insertion holes 336-339.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. When the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the connector corresponding plate 314 moves following the main control board 61. Therefore, by moving the front case body 312 relative to the main control board 61 and the connector corresponding plate 314 while the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, it is possible to change the positions of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 relative to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 while preventing the positions of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 relative to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from changing.

The front case body 312 is fixed to the rear case body 313 by screwing the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 to the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396. When the front case body 312 is fixed to the rear case body 313, the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is smaller than the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Therefore, by fixing the front case body 312 to the rear case body 313, the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b can be maintained in a state where it is smaller than the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a-365a.

Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, the through holes 391a to 393a of the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the screw holes 394a to 396a of the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396 are misaligned in the vertical direction, and cannot be fixed with screws as they are. After the front case body 312 is slid upward, the misalignment between the through holes 391a to 393a of the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the screw holes 394a to 396a of the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396 is eliminated, and the through holes 391a to 393a and the screw holes 394a to 396a are in communication with each other, making it possible to fix the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 with screws. Because the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 cannot be fixed with screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, it is possible to prevent the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 from being fixed together when the front case body 312 has not been slid upward or when the sliding has only been completed halfway.

When the front case body 312 is released from the state in which it is fixed to the rear case body 313, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be in the vertical center of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. In this state, the dimensions of the play existing between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 become larger than in the state in which the front case body 312 is fixed to the rear case body 313. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 311, by making the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 exist in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365, it is possible to facilitate the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Thereafter, the front case body 312 can be fixed to the rear case body 313 in a state in which the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a. This allows the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b-365b to be in close proximity to each other.

By moving the front case body 312 upward relative to the main control board 61 and the connector corresponding plate 314, the upper peripheral portions 362a-365a and lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365 can be moved upward relative to the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 while preventing the positions of the upper peripheral portions 336a-339a and lower peripheral portions 336b-339b of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336-339 relative to the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 from changing. This upward movement brings the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4, thereby reducing the play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c and the side peripheral portions 362b-365b. This upward movement increases the play between the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 362a-365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365, but does not change the size of the play between the upper standing wall portions 101b-104b and the upper peripheral portions 336a-339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336-339. This makes it possible to reduce the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box 311 around the lower upright walls 101c to 104c on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 while preventing the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box 311 around the upper upright walls 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from becoming too large.

Between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312, a connector corresponding plate 314 is provided that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 is smaller than the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Therefore, the connector corresponding plate 314 can narrow the range of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 311 through the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. This reduces the possibility that a conductive tampering tool such as a wire will reach the terminals 111-116 and wiring patterns on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 when a tampering attempt is made by inserting a conductive tampering tool into the gap between the upper upright walls 101b-104b and the upper peripheries 362a-365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365. This prevents the tampering attempt of manipulating signals using a conductive tampering tool.

The connector corresponding plate 314 is located between the connector group corresponding plate 361a and the fixing portions 111b-116b of the terminals 111-116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. Because the connector corresponding plate 314 is located closer to the connector group corresponding plate 361a than the fixing portions 111b-116b, the connector corresponding plate 314 can prevent a tampering tool from coming into contact with the fixing portions 111b-116b. Because the connector corresponding plate 314 is located closer to the main control board 61 than the connector group corresponding plate 361a, the connector corresponding plate 314 can be prevented from being tampered with.

The opening area of the first to fourth plate-side insertion holes 336-339 formed in the connector-compatible plate 314 is smaller than the opening area of the first to fourth front-side connector insertion holes 362-365 formed in the connector group-compatible plate portion 361a. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the connector-compatible plate 314 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted only through the first to fourth front-side connector insertion holes 362-365, the area of the area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 311 around the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 can be reduced. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud tool is electrically contacted with the area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 311.

<Alternative to the third embodiment>
The connector corresponding plate 314 may be fixed to the main control board 61 in such a manner that the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 come into contact with the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the connector corresponding plate 314. Specifically, at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the connector group mounting area 88 in the main control board 61, a pair of left and right plate fixing holes through which screws 349 for fixing the connector corresponding plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted, and plate position adjustment holes through which free ends of plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 extending from the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 can be inserted are formed. These plate fixing holes and plate position adjustment holes are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the board thickness direction. In this configuration, plate fixing holes and plate position adjustment holes are formed at positions where the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61 in a manner such that the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 abut against the upper peripheral portions 336a to 339a of the connector corresponding plate 314.

In the process of assembling the main control device 310, the connector corresponding plate 314 is placed in a state in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339, and then the two plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 are inserted into the corresponding two plate position adjustment holes. By inserting the two plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 into the corresponding two plate position adjustment holes, the fixed position of the connector corresponding plate 314 relative to the main control board 61 is determined. After that, the plate fixing bosses 341, 342 are screwed to the main control board 61 from the rear side of the main control board 61, thereby fixing it to the main control board 61. When the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding plate-side through holes 336 to 339, and the upper upright walls 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 abut against the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the connector corresponding plate 314. This makes it possible to prevent a conductive tampering tool such as a wire from being inserted between the other ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the plate-shaped part 335. This makes it possible to prevent tampering by bringing a conductive tampering tool close to the other end terminals 112, 116 of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4.

As already described in the third embodiment above, the front case body 312 is slid upward until the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 are in close proximity to the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4, and is fixed to the rear case body 313 when the sliding is complete. By configuring the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 to be close to the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365, and the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 to be in contact with the upper peripheral portions 336a-339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336-339, it is possible to protect all terminals 111-116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 from tampering involving the approach of a conductive tampering tool.

Instead of the configuration in which the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a abuts against the plate portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 when the front case body 312 and the rear case body 313 are fixed with the connector corresponding plate 314 and the main control board 61 sandwiched therebetween, a configuration in which the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a is in close proximity to the plate portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 with a predetermined gap (approximately 1 mm). The predetermined gap is a gap that makes it difficult to insert a conductive tampering tool such as a wire. Even when the configuration is such that the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a is in close proximity with a predetermined gap, it is possible to prevent a tampering tool from being inserted due to the play that exists between the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a and the plate portion 335.

- The fixing parts 111b-116b of the terminals 111-116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 may be in contact with the connector corresponding plate 314. This can reduce the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector corresponding plate 314. This can prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire through the upper play that exists between the upper upright walls 101b-104b and the upper peripheral parts 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 to contact the fixing parts 111b, 113b-115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4.

- The front case body 312 may be fixed to the rear case body 313 in a state where the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are in contact with the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365. In this configuration, the front case body 312 can be manually slid upward relative to the rear case body 313, the main control board 61, and the connector corresponding plate 314 until the position adjustment bosses 381-384 come into contact with the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385-388, thereby bringing the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c into contact with the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 401 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 47(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 in this embodiment, Figure 47(b) is a plan view of the main control board 401 showing an enlarged portion of the MPU 402, Figure 48(a) is a plan view showing the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, and Figure 48(b) is a cross-sectional view of line A-A in Figure 48(a). As in the first embodiment, the main control board 401 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle, and as shown in Figure 47(a), it has a pair of upper and lower sides 401a and 401b on the periphery, and a pair of left and right sides 401c and 401d. The main control board 401 is equipped with a large number of insert-mounted components such as the MPU 402, the first to seventh connectors CN41 to CN47, and various elements. These insert-mounted components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 401, and this side is the element mounting surface 401e.

The MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 have pins 411-413, 415, 416 (FIG. 48(a)) that extend linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 401. Although not shown, the insert-mounted components other than the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 also have pins that extend linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 401. The insert-mounted components including the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 are mounted by soldering using an insert-mounting technique such as flow soldering with these pins 411-413, 415, 416 inserted through through holes (not shown) that penetrate the main control board 401 in the thickness direction. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the board surface on the opposite side of the element mounting surface 401e in the main control board 401 is the solder surface 401f to which the pins 411-413, 415, 416 of the insert-mounted components are soldered.

As already explained in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 7, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When installed in a gaming hall, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the solder surface 401f faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the rear part of the gaming machine main body 12, and furthermore, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

In a configuration in which an insert component is mounted on element mounting surface 401e and the plate surface opposite element mounting surface 401e is solder surface 401f, as in this embodiment, there is a risk of fraud in which a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted from the side of main control device 60 and touches pins 411-413, 415, 416 (FIG. 48(a)) protruding on the solder surface 401f side. There is also a risk of fraud in which a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted from the side or front of main control device 60 and touches pins 411-413 (FIG. 47(b)) exposed on element mounting surface 401e side. Here, the side surfaces of the main control device 60 refer to the upper partition wall 124, the lower partition wall 125, the first left partition wall 126, the second left partition wall 127, the first right partition wall 128, and the second right partition wall 129 (FIG. 16(b)) of the rear case body 122 already described in the first embodiment. The configuration for detecting these fraudulent actions will now be described.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 that goes around the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e, and a tamper detection line 406 that goes around the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e at a position closer to the center of the main control board 401 than the GND line 405. The GND line 405 and the tamper detection line 406 are formed by etching a conductive metal foil (specifically, copper foil).

The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect the insertion of a conductive fraud tool, such as a flat-head screwdriver, from the side of the main control device 60. A fraud detection voltage (specifically, a voltage of +5V) is supplied to the fraud detection line 406. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406, and when it detects that the conductive fraud tool has established electrical continuity between the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405, causing a drop in the voltage of the fraud detection line 406, it determines that fraud has occurred.

The GND line 405 includes an upper GND line 405a that extends linearly along the upper edge 401a of the main control board 401 from the left end to the right end of the upper edge 401a at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm), a lower GND line 405b that extends linearly along the lower edge 401b of the main control board 401 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the lower edge 401b, a left GND line 405c that extends linearly along the left edge 401c of the main control board 401 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the left edge 401c, and a right GND line 405d that extends linearly along the right edge 401d of the main control board 401 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the right edge 401d.

The fraud detection line 406 includes an upper fraud detection line 406a that is spaced about 1 mm downward from the upper GND line 405a, a lower fraud detection line 406b that is spaced about 1 mm upward from the lower GND line 405b, a left fraud detection line 406c that is spaced about 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 405c, and a right fraud detection line 406d that is spaced about 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 405d. The upper fraud detection line 406a extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 406d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm), and the lower fraud detection line 406b extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 406d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). These top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The edge of the element mounting surface 401e is doubly surrounded by an outer GND line 405 and an inner tamper detection line 406. These GND line 405 and tamper detection line 406 are exposed on the surface of the main control board 401, and when a conductive tampering tool comes into contact with the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406, the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406 become conductive. Since the tampering detection line 406 is provided close to the GND line 405, when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the tampering tool comes into contact with both the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406, increasing the possibility that the voltage of the tampering detection line 406 will drop.

A large number of GND contacts 407 are formed on the top, bottom, left and right GND lines 405a to 405d so as to form a row in the extension direction of the GND lines 405a to 405d. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the GND contacts 407 include a through hole 407a that penetrates the main control board 401 in the plate thickness direction and has an inner peripheral surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), and lands 407b and 407c that are provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole 407a on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f. The lands 407b and 407c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 407a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 407b and 407c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 407 has a solder bulge portion 407d that bulges out from the solder surface 401f by approximately 1 mm. The solder bulge portion 407d is formed by flowing solder from the solder surface 401f side into the inside of the through hole 407a and the land 407c on the solder surface 401f side. The solder bulge portion 407d of all the GND contact portions 407 is electrically connected to the GND line 405. Since the solder bulge portion 407d bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge portion 407d is increased. In the GND lines 405a to 405d on the top, bottom, left and right, the GND contact portions 407 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tamper tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 407d of one of the GND contact parts 407.

A large number of fraud detection contacts 408 are formed on the top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d so as to form a line in the extension direction of the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the fraud detection contact 408 includes a through hole 408a that penetrates the main control board 401 in the thickness direction and has an inner circumferential surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), and lands 408b and 408c that are provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole 408a on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f. The lands 408b and 408c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 408a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 408b and 408c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact 408 has a solder bulge 408d that bulges out from the solder surface 401f by approximately 1 mm. The solder bulge 408d is formed by flowing solder from the solder surface 401f side into the inside of the through hole 408a and the land 408c on the solder surface 401f side. The solder bulge 408d of all the fraud detection contacts 408 is electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. Since the solder bulge 408d bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d is increased. In the top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d, the fraud detection contacts 408 are equally spaced so that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts 408 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tamper tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d of one of the tamper detection contacts 408.

As already explained, on element mounting surface 401e, tamper detection line 406 is provided close to GND line 405. Therefore, on solder surface 401f, tamper detection contact portion 408 and GND contact portion 407 are close to each other. This increases the possibility that when a conductive tamper tool is brought close to solder surface 401f, one or more GND contact portions 407 and one or more tamper detection contact portions 408 come into contact with each other, causing a drop in the voltage of tamper detection line 406.

As shown in FIG. 47(a) and FIG. 47(b), the MPU 402 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The MPU 402 has a number of pins 411-413, including a GND connection pin 411 and a fraud detection connection pin 412, and these pins 411-413 are soldered to the solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48(a), a gap larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm gap between adjacent fraud detection contacts 408 is provided near the center of the right side 401d of the solder surface 401f, and a copper wiring 414 is formed through the gap to electrically connect one GND contact 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402. The wiring 414 is covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that it is not exposed on the surface.

As shown in Figure 47 (a), a first connector CN41 is mounted on the upper edge 401a side of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The first connector CN41 has a number of pins 415, 416 (Figure 48 (a)), one of which is a voltage supply pin 415 (Figure 48 (a)) that supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 406 (Figure 48 (a)). The number of pins 415, 416, including the voltage supply pin 415, are soldered to the solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48(a), on the solder surface 401f, a copper wiring 417 is formed that electrically connects one tamper detection contact 408 provided near the right side 401d of the main control board 401 to the tamper detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402, and a copper wiring 418 is formed that electrically connects one tamper detection contact 408 provided near the top side 401a of the main control board 401 to the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41. These wirings 417, 418 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed on the surface.

When operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a fraud detection voltage (specifically, a voltage of +5V) is supplied to the fraud detection line 406 via the voltage supply pin 415 and wiring 418 of the first connector CN41, and the fraud detection voltage is supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection line 406, the fraud detection connection pin 412, and wiring 417. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection connection pin 412, and can determine that the state is normal if the voltage is the fraud detection voltage.

As already explained, the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 are close to each other on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401. Therefore, when a conductive fraud tool such as a flat head screwdriver is inserted into the solder surface 401f from the side of the main control device 60 and comes into contact with the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408, the fraud tool provides electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406. Also, as already explained, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are provided close to each other on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, when a conductive fraud tool such as a flat head screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 401e from the side or front of the main control device 60 and comes into contact with the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, the fraud tool provides electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406, and when it determines that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conductive and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 has dropped, it determines that an abnormality has occurred in the fraud detection line 406.

Next, the fraud detection process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 49. Note that the fraud detection process is executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the fraud detection process, first, the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 connected to the input side of the MPU 402 is monitored to determine whether a drop in the voltage has been detected (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether a fraud to be monitored has occurred (step S902). In step S902, similar to the fraud detection process in the first embodiment described above (step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), it is determined that a fraud to be monitored has occurred based on the detection signals received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203. If a fraud to be monitored has not occurred (step S902: NO), the fraud detection process is terminated.

When a positive judgment is made in step S901 or when a positive judgment is made in step S902, an abnormality notification process is executed (step S903). In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 70. The abnormality notification command is a command for causing the audio and light emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing an abnormality notification to notify that an abnormality, radio wave abnormality, or magnetic abnormality has occurred in the fraud detection line 406. When the audio and light emission control device 70 receives the abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54, the light emission of the display light emission unit 53, and the display control device 90 to notify that fraud has been detected. This makes it possible to grasp from outside the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality, radio wave abnormality, or magnetic abnormality has been detected in the fraud detection line 406. In addition, in the abnormality notification process in step S903, an abnormality signal is output to the management computer (not shown), which is an external device of the game hall. This makes it possible to grasp that an abnormality, radio wave abnormality, or magnetic abnormality has been detected in the fraud detection line 406 by the management computer.

Then, the game stop flag in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S904), and the fraud detection process is terminated. As already explained in the first embodiment above, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the process for progressing the game in the timer interrupt process (Figure 27) (the processes in steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406. The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that allows the insertion of a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver from the side of the main control device 60 to be detected. A voltage for fraud detection is supplied to the fraud detection line 406. The main control board 401 is provided with a number of GND contacts 407 along the GND line 405, and a number of fraud detection contacts 408 along the fraud detection line 406. All of the GND contacts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all of the fraud detection contacts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contacts 407 and the fraud detection contacts 408 are provided with solder bulges 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. When a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 and the tampering tool is in contact with both the solder bulge 407d of one or more GND contacts 407 and the solder bulge 408d of one or more tampering detection contacts 408, the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406 are electrically connected. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the tampering detection line 406, and when it is determined that the conductive tampering tool has caused the tampering detection line 406 and the GND line 405 to be electrically connected and the voltage of the tampering detection line 406 to drop, it identifies that tampering has been performed. This makes it possible to discover the tampering of inserting a conductive tampering tool on the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401. On solder surface 401f, where pins 411-413, 415, and 416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, if a conductive tampering tool is brought into contact with the solder fixing points and their surroundings, there is a risk that signals sent from or received by the various electronic components may be tampered with. In contrast, by using a configuration that can detect the tampering of bringing a conductive tampering tool close to solder surface 401f, the possibility of the tampering being committed without the manager of the amusement hall noticing is reduced.

On the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are exposed on the surface. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the element mounting surface 401e side and the fraud tool comes into contact with both the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 become conductive, and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops. This makes it possible to know that the fraud has occurred.

On the element mounting surface 401e, the tamper detection line 406 is arranged in parallel with the GND line 405. This increases the possibility that when a conductive tamper tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the tamper tool will come into contact with both the GND line 405 and the tamper detection line 406, causing a voltage drop on the tamper detection line 406.

When the main CPU 64 detects a voltage drop in the fraud detection line 406, it executes an abnormality notification process. This allows the abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 to be notified to the manager of the amusement hall.

The GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are each provided along the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 from the side of the main control device 60, it is possible to increase the likelihood that the fraud tool will cause electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

The GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are each provided around the entire periphery of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided only on a portion of the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e, when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 from the side of the main control device 60, it is possible to increase the likelihood that the fraud tool will cause electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act early.

The main control board 401 is provided with a large number of GND contacts 407 along the GND line 405, and a large number of fraud detection contacts 408 along the fraud detection line 406. All of the GND contacts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all of the fraud detection contacts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contacts 407 and the fraud detection contacts 408 have solder bulges 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. The solder bulge 407d of the GND contacts 407 bulges from the solder surface 401f, increasing the possibility that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 will come into electrical contact with the solder bulge 407d of the GND contacts 407. Since the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 bulges from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 will come into electrical contact with the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 is increased. Therefore, when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f where the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 401 and the main control board 401 are fixed by solder, it is possible to increase the possibility that the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 will be electrically connected by the tampering tool. On solder surface 401f, where pins 411-413, 415, and 416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, if a conductive tampering tool is brought into contact with the solder fixing points and their surroundings, there is a risk that signals sent from or received by the various electronic components may be tampered with. In contrast, by using a configuration that can detect the tampering of bringing a conductive tampering tool close to solder surface 401f, the possibility of the tampering being committed without the manager of the amusement hall noticing is reduced.

On the solder surface 401f, the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 is arranged in parallel with the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407. This increases the likelihood that when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f side, the tampering tool will be in contact with both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the tampering detection contact portion 408, causing a voltage drop on the tampering detection line 406.

The periphery of the solder surface 401f is doubly surrounded by the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact 407, which is intermittently arranged on the outside, and the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact 408, which is intermittently arranged closer to the center of the main control board 401 than the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact 407. Therefore, when a conductive fraud tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 from the side of the main control device 60, the fraud tool comes into contact with both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact 408, increasing the possibility that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 will drop.

The GND line 405 includes a continuous upper GND line 405a, a lower GND line 405b, a left GND line 405c, and a right GND line 405d on the upper, lower, left, and right peripheries of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the GND lines 405a to 405c are formed discontinuously, when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the main control board 401, it is possible to increase the possibility that the tampering tool will come into contact with any of the GND lines 405a to 405d.

The four GND lines 405a to 405d are connected to the ground of the main control board 401. This makes it possible to create a state in which the voltage in the fraud detection line 406 drops when a conductive fraud tool comes into contact with any of the GND lines 405a to 405d and the fraud detection line 406, causing the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 to be conductive. This makes it easier to identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are conductive.

The fraud detection line 406 is located closer to the center of the device mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 than the four GND lines 405a to 405d and includes a continuous upper fraud detection line 406a, lower fraud detection line 406b, left fraud detection line 406c, and right fraud detection line 406d. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the fraud detection lines 406a to 406c are formed discontinuously, when a conductive fraud tool is brought close to the main control board 401, the likelihood that the fraud tool will come into contact with any of the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d can be increased.

A voltage for fraud detection is supplied to all four fraud detection lines 406a-406d. As a result, when a conductive fraud tool is in contact with both one of the GND lines 405a-405d and one of the fraud detection lines 406a-406d, it is possible to create a state in which the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state and the voltage in the fraud detection line 406 is dropping, regardless of where the fraud tool is in contact with the fraud detection line 406a-406d. This makes it easier to identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state.

The GND contact portions 407 are provided at equal intervals along the upper GND line 405a, the lower GND line 405b, the left GND line 405c, and the right GND line 405d such that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge portion 407d of any of the GND contact portions 407.

The fraud detection contacts 408 are equally spaced along the upper fraud detection line 406a, the lower fraud detection line 406b, the left fraud detection line 406c, and the right fraud detection line 406d such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts 408 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d of any of the fraud detection contacts 408.

<Alternative to the fourth embodiment>
In the abnormality notification process performed in step S903 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 49), the manner of abnormality notification performed when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected may be different from the manner of abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected. Specifically, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a first abnormality notification command to the voice and light emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The first abnormality notification command is a command for causing the voice and light emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing a first abnormality notification that notifies that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. When the voice and light emission control device 70 receives the first abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54, the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53, and the display control device 90 to notify that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. In the first abnormality notification, the speaker unit 54 outputs a sound saying "First abnormality has occurred", the display light-emitting unit 53 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality of the fraud detection line 406, and the words "First abnormality has occurred" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible to know from outside the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. Furthermore, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 outputs a first abnormality signal to the management computer (not shown), which is an external device, of the game hall in the abnormality notification process. This makes it possible for the management computer to know that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

When a radio wave anomaly or a magnetic anomaly is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a second abnormality notification command to the sound and light emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The second abnormality notification command is a command for causing the sound and light emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing a second abnormality notification to notify that a radio wave anomaly or a magnetic anomaly has been detected. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives the second abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54, the light emission of the display light emission unit 53, and the display control device 90 to notify that a radio wave anomaly or a magnetic anomaly has been detected. In the second abnormality notification, the sound "second abnormality has occurred" is output from the speaker unit 54, the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the radio wave anomaly or the magnetic anomaly, and the characters "second abnormality has occurred" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible to grasp from outside the pachinko machine 10 that a radio wave anomaly or a magnetic anomaly has been detected. Furthermore, if a radio wave or magnetic anomaly is detected, the main CPU 64 outputs a second anomaly signal to the external device, the game hall's management computer (not shown), during the anomaly notification process. This allows the management computer to know that a radio wave or magnetic anomaly has been detected.

In this way, in a configuration in which a second abnormality notification is issued when a radio wave abnormality or magnetic abnormality is detected, a first abnormality notification different from the second abnormality notification is issued when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, making it possible to quickly grasp that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

- In the main control board 401, the board surface on which the wiring 414 electrically connecting one GND contact 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402, the wiring 417 electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 408 and the tamper detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402, and the wiring 418 electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 408 and the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41 are formed is not limited to the solder surface 401f. A configuration in which some or all of these wirings 414, 417, 418 are formed on the element mounting surface 401e may also be used.

- The main control board 401 may be configured so that the board surface on which the GND line 405 is provided (the element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and the board surface on which the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided (the solder surface 401f in the fourth embodiment) are reversed. By configuring the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e, it is possible to increase the possibility that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 will come into contact with the GND contact portion 407.

- The main control board 401 may be configured so that the board surface on which the fraud detection line 406 is provided (the element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and the board surface on which the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact 408 is provided (the solder surface 401f in the fourth embodiment) are reversed. By configuring the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact 408 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 will come into contact with the fraud detection contact 408.

- A configuration may be used in which solder is applied to the entire area of the GND line 405 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 to form a solder bulge region. The solder bulge region bulges out from the element mounting surface 401e by approximately 1 mm. This increases the likelihood that when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the tampering tool will come into electrical contact with the GND line 405 through the solder bulge region.

- A configuration may be used in which solder is applied to the entire area of the fraud detection line 406 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 to form a solder bulge area. The solder bulge area bulges out from the element mounting surface 401e by approximately 1 mm. This increases the likelihood that when a conductive fraud tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud tool will come into electrical contact with the fraud detection line 406 through the solder bulge area.

Instead of a configuration in which both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 are provided on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, only one of these two types of solder bulge portions 407d, 408d may be provided on the solder surface 401f. In a configuration in which only the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the tamper detection contact portion 408 has a solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 408a of the tamper detection contact portion 408 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not bulge from the solder surface 401f and is flush with the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is exposed, and when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f side and comes into contact with both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder contact portion of the tampering detection contact portion 408, the tampering tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406. In a configuration in which only the solder bulge 408d of the tampering detection contact portion 408 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the GND contact portion 407 has a solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 407a of the GND contact portion 407 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not bulge from the solder surface 401f and is flush with the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is exposed, and when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f side and comes into contact with both the solder contact portion of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge portion 408d of the tampering detection contact portion 408, the tampering tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406. In this way, even if only one of the solder bulge portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulge portion 408d of the tampering detection contact portion 408 is provided on the solder surface 401f, by providing a solder contact portion on the other, it is possible to know that a tampering act of bringing a conductive tampering tool close to the solder surface 401f has been performed.

Fifth embodiment
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that it includes a configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The configuration that differs from the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for monitoring unauthorized activity when the power is cut off in this embodiment.

As in the fourth embodiment, the element mounting surface 401e (FIG. 47(a)) of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406. Also, the solder surface 401f (FIG. 48(a)) of the main control board 401 is provided with a number of GND contacts 407 electrically connected to the GND line 405 and a number of fraud detection contacts 408 electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The main control board 401 in this embodiment is provided with a MOSFET 421 that can switch between a state in which a voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406 and a state in which a voltage is not supplied, and a fraud detection capacitor 422 that can detect a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver close to the solder surface 401f in a power-off state. These MOSFETs 421 and fraud detection capacitors 422 are mounted on the element mounting surface 401e.

MOSFET 421 has a gate terminal 421a, a source terminal 421b, and a drain terminal 421c. In MOSFET 421, when the input voltage of gate terminal 421a is in a HI state, a current flows between source terminal 421b and drain terminal 421c, and when the input voltage of gate terminal 421a is in a LOW state, no current flows between source terminal 421b and drain terminal 421c.

The gate terminal 421a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 by copper wiring 423. The main CPU 64 controls the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a. The source terminal 421b is connected to the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41, which supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 406, and the drain terminal 421c is connected to the fraud detection line 406.

The fraud detection capacitor 422 has a first terminal 422a and a second terminal 422b. The first terminal 422a is electrically connected to a wiring 425 that connects the fraud detection line 406 and the main CPU 64 by a copper wiring 424. The second terminal 422b is electrically connected to the GND line 405.

After the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins, the main CPU 64 sets the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state. This causes a voltage to be supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and charge accumulates in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422. The main CPU 64 can determine whether or not charge has accumulated in the first terminal 422a based on the voltage of the wiring 425.

When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the power is cut off while electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is retained as it is. In the power cut-off state, when a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 from the side of the main control device 60 and comes into contact with one or more GND contacts 407 and one or more tampering detection contacts 408, the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406 are conductive. Also, in the power cut-off state, when a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 from the side or front of the main control device 60 and comes into contact with the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406, the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406 are conductive. When the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are conductive, the charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a escapes to the GND line 405. This results in a state in which no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, and if no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, it determines that a fraudulent act of bringing a fraudulent tool close while the power is cut off has occurred.

Next, the power-on setting process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 51. Note that the power-on setting process is executed in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 26).

In the power-on setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422 (step S1001). If no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a (step S1001: NO), this means that the charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a has been lost in the power-off state, so an abnormality notification process is executed (step S1002). In the abnormality notification process, a corresponding abnormality notification command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 70. When the sound and light emission control device 70 receives the abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54, the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 53, and the display control device 90 to notify that fraud has been detected in the power-off state. This makes it possible to know from outside the pachinko machine 10 that fraud has been detected in the power-off state. In addition, in the abnormality notification process in step S1002, an abnormality signal is output to the management computer (not shown), which is an external device of the game hall. This makes it possible for the management computer to know that fraud has been detected in the power-off state.

If a positive determination is made in step S1001, or if the process of step S1002 is performed, an input voltage raising process is performed to raise the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a from a LOW state to a HIGH state (step S1003). This causes a voltage to be supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a.

After that, an initial value setting process is executed to set a predetermined area of the main RAM 66 to an initial value, such as initializing the power outage flag (step S1004), and a command transmission process for the game state is executed to transmit a command corresponding to the current game state to the sound and light emission control device 70 so that the current game state can be recognized (step S1005), and then the power-on setting process is terminated.

As described above, after the supply of operating power starts, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not a charge has accumulated in the first terminal 422a before raising the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the first terminal 422a in the power-off state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that no charge has accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the abnormality notification process is executed in step S1002, and then the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is raised to the HI state. This prevents a negative determination from being made again in step S1001 and the abnormality notification process in step S1002 from being executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped after the abnormality notification process is executed and then the supply of operating power is resumed, even though no fraudulent activity has been performed.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The main control board 401 is equipped with a fraud detection capacitor 422 in which an electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a when operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is lost when the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are connected by a conductive fraud tool inserted into the main control device 60 after the power is cut off. Therefore, by determining whether an electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 has started, it is possible to determine whether fraud has occurred in the power cut off state.

If the main CPU 64 determines in step S1001 of the power-on setting process (FIG. 51) that no charge is stored in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422, it executes an abnormality notification process. Based on the abnormality notification process being executed, the manager of the gaming hall can know that the charge stored in the first terminal 422a has been lost due to fraudulent activity performed while the power was cut off.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the fourth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 52 (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 in this embodiment, Figure 52 (b) is a plan view of the main control board 431 showing an enlarged portion of the MPU 432, Figure 53 (a) is a plan view showing the board back surface 431f of the main control board 431, and Figure 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of line A-A in Figure 53 (a). As in the first embodiment, the main control board 431 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle, and as shown in Figure 52 (a), it has a pair of upper and lower sides 431a and 431b on the periphery, and a pair of left and right sides 431c and 431d. A large number of surface-mounted components such as the MPU 432, the first to seventh connectors CN51 to CN57, and various elements are attached to the main control board 431. These surface-mounted components are mounted only on one side of the board surface of the main control board 431, and this board surface is the element mounting surface 431e.

The MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 have terminals 441-443, 445, 446 (Figures 52 (a) and (b)) that extend along the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Although not shown, surface mount components other than the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 also have terminals that extend along the element mounting surface 431e. The surface mount components including the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 are mounted on the element mounting surface 431e side by soldering these terminals 441-443, 445, 446 to the element mounting surface 431e using a surface mounting technique such as reflow soldering. In this embodiment, the terminals 441-443, 445, 446 of the surface mount components are present only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, and are not present on the back surface 431f side of the board. A wiring pattern (not shown) that electrically connects the terminals (not shown) of the surface-mounted components is formed on the element mounting surface 431e.

As already explained in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 7, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When installed in a gaming hall, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the board back surface 431f faces the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main control device 60 constitutes the rear part of the gaming machine main body 12, and furthermore, since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

In a configuration in which the terminals 441-443, 445, and 446 of the surface-mounted components are present only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, as in this embodiment, there is a risk of fraud in which a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted from the side or front side of the main control device 60 and contacts the terminals 441-443, 445, and 446 present on the element mounting surface 431e side. The configuration for detecting such fraud will now be described.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), a GND line 435 that goes around the periphery of the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is provided on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, and a tamper detection line 436 that goes around the periphery of the back surface 431f is provided at a position closer to the center of the main control board 431 than the GND line 435. The GND line 435 and the tamper detection line 436 are formed by etching a conductive metal foil (specifically, copper foil).

The fraud detection line 436 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect the insertion of a conductive fraud tool, such as a flathead screwdriver, from the side of the main control device 60. A fraud detection voltage (specifically, a voltage of +5V) is supplied to the fraud detection line 436. As in the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, and when it detects that the conductive fraud tool has established electrical continuity between the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435, causing a drop in the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, it determines that fraud has occurred.

The GND line 435 includes an upper GND line 435a that extends linearly along the upper edge 431a of the main control board 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper edge 431a at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm), a lower GND line 435b that extends linearly along the lower edge 431b of the main control board 431 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the lower edge 431b, a left GND line 435c that extends linearly along the left edge 431c of the main control board 431 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the left edge 431c, and a right GND line 435d that extends linearly along the right edge 431d of the main control board 431 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the upper end to the lower end of the right edge 431d.

The fraud detection line 436 includes an upper fraud detection line 436a that is spaced about 1 mm downward from the upper GND line 435a, a lower fraud detection line 436b that is spaced about 1 mm upward from the lower GND line 435b, a left fraud detection line 436c that is spaced about 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 435c, and a right fraud detection line 436d that is spaced about 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 435d. The upper fraud detection line 436a extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 436d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm), and the lower fraud detection line 436b extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 436d with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of about 1.5 mm). These top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The periphery of the back surface 431f of the board is doubly surrounded by an outer GND line 435 and an inner tamper detection line 436. These GND lines 435 and tamper detection lines 436 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed on the surface.

A large number of GND contacts 437 are formed on the top, bottom, left and right GND lines 435a to 435d so as to form a row in the extension direction of the GND lines 435a to 435d. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the GND contacts 437 include a through hole 437a that penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction and has an inner peripheral surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), and lands 437b and 437c that are provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole 437a on the element mounting surface 431e and the board back surface 431f. The lands 437b and 437c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 437a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 437b and 437c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 437 has a solder bulge portion 437d that bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e by approximately 1 mm. The solder bulge portion 437d is formed by flowing solder into the inside of the through hole 437a and into the land 437b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder bulge portion 437d of all the GND contact portions 437 is electrically connected to the GND line 435. Since the solder bulge portion 437d bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge portion 437d is increased. In the GND lines 435a to 435d on the top, bottom, left and right, the GND contact portions 437 are provided at equal intervals so that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tamper tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 437d of one of the GND contacts 437.

A large number of fraud detection contacts 438 are formed on the top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d so as to form a line in the extension direction of the fraud detection lines 436a to 436d. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the fraud detection contact 438 includes a through hole 438a that penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction and has an inner peripheral surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), and lands 438b and 438c that are provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole 438a on the element mounting surface 431e and the board back surface 431f. The lands 438b and 438c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 438a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 438b and 438c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact 438 has a solder bulge 438d that bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e by approximately 1 mm. The solder bulge 438d is formed by flowing solder into the inside of the through hole 438a and into the land 438b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder bulge 438d of all the fraud detection contacts 438 is electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. Since the solder bulge 438d bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 438d is increased. In the top, bottom, left and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d, the fraud detection contacts 438 are equally spaced so that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts 438 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tamper tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 438d of one of the tamper detection contacts 438.

On the back surface 431f of the board, the tamper detection line 436 is provided close to the GND line 435, and on the element mounting surface 431e, the tamper detection contact portion 438 and the GND contact portion 437 are located close to each other. This increases the possibility that when a conductive tamper tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, one or more GND contact portions 437 and one or more tamper detection contact portions 438 come into contact with each other, causing a drop in the voltage of the tamper detection line 436.

As shown in FIG. 52(a) and FIG. 52(b), the MPU 432 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The MPU 432 has a number of terminals 441-443, including a GND connection terminal 441 and a fraud detection connection terminal 442, and these terminals 441-443 are soldered to the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53(a), a gap larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm gap between adjacent fraud detection contacts 438 is provided near the center of the right side 431d of the back surface 431f of the board, and a copper wiring 444 is formed through the gap to electrically connect one GND contact 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432. The wiring 444 is covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that it is not exposed to the surface.

As shown in Figure 52 (a), a first connector CN51 is mounted on the upper edge 431a side of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The first connector CN51 has a number of terminals 445, 446, one of which is a voltage supply terminal 445 (Figure 53 (a)) that supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 436 (Figure 53 (a)). The multiple terminals 445, 446, including the voltage supply terminal 445, are soldered to the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53(a), copper wiring 447 is formed on the back surface 431f of the board, electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 438 provided near the right side 431d of the main control board 431 to the tamper detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432, and copper wiring 448 is formed on the back surface 431f of the board, electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 438 provided near the top side 431a of the main control board 431 to the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51. These wirings 447, 448 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed on the surface.

When operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a fraud detection voltage (specifically, a voltage of +5V) is supplied to the fraud detection line 436 via the voltage supply terminal 445 and wiring 448 of the first connector CN51, and the fraud detection voltage is supplied to the input side of the MPU 432 via the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection connection terminal 442. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 432 via the fraud detection connection terminal 442, and can determine that the state is normal if the voltage is the fraud detection voltage.

As already explained, the GND contact 437 and the fraud detection contact 438 are close to each other on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, when a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e from the side or front of the main control device 60 and comes into contact with the GND contact 437 and the fraud detection contact 438, the fraud tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, and when it determines that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conductive and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 has dropped, it determines that an abnormality has occurred in the fraud detection line 436.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is provided with a GND line 435 and a fraud detection line 436. The fraud detection line 436 is an electrical wiring that allows the insertion of a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver from the side of the main control device 60 to be detected. A voltage for fraud detection is supplied to the fraud detection line 436. The main control board 431 is provided with a number of GND contacts 437 along the GND line 435, and a number of fraud detection contacts 438 along the fraud detection line 436. All of the GND contacts 437 are electrically connected to the GND line 435, and all of the fraud detection contacts 438 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. The GND contacts 437 and the fraud detection contacts 438 are provided with solder bulges 437d and 438d that bulge from the element mounting surface 401e. When a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 and the tampering tool is in contact with both the solder bulge 437d of one or more GND contacts 437 and the solder bulge 438d of one or more tampering detection contacts 438, the GND line 435 and the tampering detection line 436 are electrically connected. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the tampering detection line 436, and when it is determined that the conductive tampering tool has caused the tampering detection line 436 and the GND line 435 to be electrically connected and the voltage of the tampering detection line 436 to drop, it identifies that tampering has been performed. This makes it possible to discover the tampering of inserting a conductive tampering tool on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431. In the case of a fraudulent act of touching a conductive fraudulent tool to the soldered fixing points and their surroundings on element mounting surface 431e, where terminals 441-443, 445, and 446 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, there is a risk that the signals transmitted from or received by the various electronic components may be fraudulently altered. In contrast, by using a configuration that can detect the fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraudulent tool close to element mounting surface 431e, the possibility of the fraudulent act being committed without the manager of the game hall noticing is reduced.

Since the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 bulges from the rear surface 431f of the board, there is an increased possibility that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the rear surface 431f side of the main control board 431 will come into electrical contact with the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437.

Since the solder bulge 438d of the tamper detection contact 438 bulges from the rear surface 431f of the board, it is more likely that a conductive tamper tool brought close to the rear surface 431f side of the main control board 431 will come into electrical contact with the solder bulge 438d of the tamper detection contact 438.

On the element mounting surface 431e, the solder bulge 438d of the tamper detection contact 438 is arranged in parallel with the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact 437. This increases the likelihood that when a conductive tamper tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the tamper tool will be in contact with both the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the tamper detection contact 438. This increases the likelihood that the tamper detection line 436 and the GND line 435 will be conductive, causing a voltage drop on the tamper detection line 436.

The solder bulge 437d of the GND contact 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact 438 are each provided intermittently along the periphery of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 from the side of the main control device 60, the fraud tool is more likely to be in contact with both the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact 438. This increases the possibility that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are conductive and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops. Therefore, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act early.

The solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 are each provided around the entire periphery of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided only on a portion of the periphery of the element mounting surface 431e, when a fraudulent act is committed in which a conductive fraud tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control device 60 from the side of the main control device 60, the fraud tool is more likely to be in contact with both the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438.

The GND contact portions 437 are provided at equal intervals along the upper GND line 435a, the lower GND line 435b, the left GND line 435c, and the right GND line 435d such that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge portion 437d of any of the GND contact portions 437.

The fraud detection contacts 438 are equally spaced along the upper fraud detection line 436a, the lower fraud detection line 436b, the left fraud detection line 436c, and the right fraud detection line 436d such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts 438 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the likelihood that a conductive fraud tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 438d of any of the fraud detection contacts 438.

<Alternative to the sixth embodiment>
In the main control board 431, the board surface on which the wiring 444 electrically connecting one GND contact 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432, the wiring 447 electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 438 and the tamper detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432, and the wiring 448 electrically connecting one tamper detection contact 438 and the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51 are formed is not limited to the element mounting surface 431e. A configuration in which some or all of these wirings 444, 447, 448 are formed on the board back surface 431f may also be used.

-In the main control board 431, instead of the configuration in which the GND line 435 is provided on the back surface 431f of the board, the GND line 435 may be provided on the element mounting surface 431e. In the GND line 435 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of the area other than the area where the GND contact portion 437 is provided is covered with resist. As in the sixth embodiment, the solder bulge portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side and bulges out by about 1 mm from the resist that covers the area of the GND line 435 other than the area where the GND contact portion 437 is provided. This increases the possibility that a conductive tampering tool will come into contact with the GND contact portion 437 when it is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431. In this way, even if the GND line 435 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 can be brought into contact with a conductive tampering tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e.

-In the main control board 431, instead of the configuration in which the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the board back surface 431f, the fraud detection line 436 may be provided on the element mounting surface 431e. In the fraud detection line 436 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of the area other than the area where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided is covered with resist. As in the sixth embodiment, the solder bulge portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side, and bulges out by about 1 mm from the resist that covers the area of the fraud detection line 436 other than the area where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided. This increases the possibility that a conductive fraud tool will come into contact with the fraud detection contact portion 438 when it is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431. In this way, even if the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 can be brought into contact with a conductive fraud tool brought close to the element mounting surface 431e.

Instead of a configuration in which both the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 are provided on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, only one of these two types of solder bulge portions 437d, 438d may be provided on the element mounting surface 431e. In a configuration in which only the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 has a solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 438a of the fraud detection contact portion 438 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but does not bulge from the element mounting surface 431e and is flush with the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is exposed, and when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side and comes into contact with both the solder bulge portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder contact portion of the tampering detection contact portion 438, the tampering tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line 435 and the tampering detection line 436. In addition, in a configuration in which only the solder bulge portion 438d of the tampering detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 has a solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 437a of the GND contact portion 437 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but does not bulge from the element mounting surface 431e and is flush with the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is exposed, and when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e and comes into contact with both the solder contact portion of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge portion 438d of the tampering detection contact portion 438, the tampering tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line 435 and the tampering detection line 436. In this way, even if only one of the solder bulge portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge portion 438d of the tampering detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, by providing a solder contact portion on the other, it is possible to know that a tampering act of bringing a conductive tampering tool close to the element mounting surface 431e has been performed.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for executing the power outage monitoring process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 54(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in this embodiment, and Figure 54(b) is a plan view of the main control board 451 showing an enlarged view of the center area.

As in the fourth embodiment, the main control board 451 is fitted with a large number of insertable components such as an MPU 452, the first to seventh connectors CN61 to CN67, and various elements. These insertable components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 451, which serves as the element mounting surface 451a.

The insertion mounting components have pins (not shown) that extend linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 451. The insertion mounting components are mounted by soldering using an insertion mounting technique such as flow soldering, with the pins inserted into through holes (not shown) that penetrate the main control board 451 in the thickness direction. The board surface on the opposite side to the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 is the solder surface to which the pins of the insertion mounting components are soldered.

The element mounting surface 451a is provided with a connector group mounting area 453 on which the first to fourth connectors CN61 to CN64 are mounted, fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 454 to 456 on which the fifth to seventh connectors CN65 to CN67 are mounted, and an element mounting area 457 on which a large number of elements are mounted.

The MPU 452 is mounted near the center of the element mounting area 457, and a power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted between the MPU 452 and the connector group mounting area 453 in the element mounting area 457. The power failure monitoring device 461 includes a power supply voltage terminal 461a to which a power supply voltage of +36V (DC 36V) is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN61, a drive voltage terminal 461b to which a DC 5V element drive voltage is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN61, a reset signal terminal 461c for sending a reset signal to the MPU 452, and a power failure signal terminal 461d for sending a power failure signal to the MPU 452. Note that the wiring connecting the first connector CN61 and the power failure monitoring device 461 is omitted in Figures 54(a) and 54(b).

The MPU 452 has a reset signal receiving terminal 462 that receives a reset signal, and a power failure signal receiving terminal 463 that receives a power failure signal. A reset signal wiring 464 that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 461c and the reset signal receiving terminal 462, and a power failure signal wiring 465 that electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 461d and the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 are formed on the solder surface, which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. The reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are copper wiring patterns, and are covered with an insulating resist so as not to be exposed on the surface.

The power failure monitoring device 461 monitors the power supply voltage input from the power supply and firing control device 78, and when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure reference voltage of +24V (DC 24V), it determines that the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped. When the power failure monitoring device 461 determines that the supply of operating power will be stopped, it drops the power failure signal output to the MPU 452 from a HI state to a LOW state. By detecting the fall of the power failure signal from a HI state to a LOW state, the main CPU 64 determines that the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped, and executes power failure processing in the power failure information storage process (step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) as in the first embodiment.

The power failure monitoring device 461 drops the reset signal from HI to LOW a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) after the power failure signal is dropped. The operation of the main CPU 64 stops when the reset signal falls. In order to execute power failure processing, the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 needs to be maintained at +5V (DC 5V) until the power failure processing is completed. In this embodiment, the power failure reference voltage is set to 24V so that sufficient time can be secured to execute the power failure processing. Note that the power failure reference voltage is not limited to +24V and can be any value as long as sufficient time can be secured to execute the power failure processing.

<Power outage information storage process>
Next, the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 55. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 27).

In the power outage information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not a fall from a HIGH state to a LOW state has been detected in the power outage signal received from the power outage monitoring device 461 (step S1101). If a fall in the power outage signal has not been detected (step S1101: NO), the power outage information storage process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a falling edge of the power outage signal is detected (step S1101: YES), power outage processing (processing of steps S1102 to S1104) is executed. Specifically, the checksum of the main RAM 66 is first calculated (step S1102), and the calculated checksum is saved (step S1103). After that, the power outage flag provided in the main RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S1104), and this power outage information storage processing is terminated. The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to know that the power outage processing (processing of steps S1102 to S1104) has been executed normally when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 64 is stopped.

Next, the manner in which the power failure processing is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of Figures 56(a) to 56(g). Figure 56(a) shows the period during which the power failure processing is executed by the main CPU 64, Figure 56(b) shows the power supply voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461, Figure 56(c) shows the element drive voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461, Figure 56(d) shows the state of the power failure signal, Figure 56(e) shows the state of the reset signal, Figure 56(f) shows the timing when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and Figure 56(g) shows the timing when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 56(f), when the supply of operating power begins at the timing of t1, the power supply voltage and element drive voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 begin to rise at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 56(b) and FIG. 56(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(c), when the element drive voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 reaches the normal operating range voltage (+5V) at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 56(d), the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the power failure signal from the LOW state to the HIGH state at the timing of t2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(b), at the timing of t3, the power supply voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 reaches +36V (DC 36V). After that, at the timing of t4, which is a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) after the timing of t2, the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the reset signal from the LOW state to the HIGH state, as shown in FIG. 56(e). The raising of the reset signal causes the main CPU 64 to start operating.

The time from t2 when the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the power failure signal to t4 when it raises the reset signal is set to a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) that is sufficient to stabilize the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 at +5V (DC 5V). This makes it possible to start operation of the main CPU 64 after a stable element drive voltage of +5V (DC 5V) can be supplied to the MPU 452.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(g), when the supply of operating power is stopped at the timing of t5, the power supply voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 starts to drop from +36V (DC 36V) as shown in FIG. 56(b), and at the timing of t6 it becomes equal to or lower than the power failure reference voltage (specifically +24V). As shown in FIG. 56(d), the power failure monitoring device 461 drops the power failure signal from the HI state to the LOW state at the timing of t6.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the main CPU 64 detects the falling edge of the power outage signal in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 55) performed at timing t7, and starts power outage processing (steps S1102 to S1104 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 55)). The power outage processing ends at timing t8.

During the period from timing t7 to timing t8 when the power failure processing is executed, the reset signal is maintained in the HI state as shown in FIG. 56(e), and the element drive voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 is maintained at a normal voltage (specifically, +5V) as shown in FIG. 56(c). This allows the power failure processing to be completed before the operation of the main CPU 64 stops, and when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins, gameplay can be resumed normally from the state before the supply of operating power was stopped.

After that, at t9, which is later than t8 and a predetermined time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) after t6, the power failure monitoring device 461 drops the reset signal from HI to LOW, as shown in FIG. 56(e). This stops the operation of the main CPU 64. Then, at t10, the element drive voltage input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to the power failure monitoring device 461 begins to drop, as shown in FIG. 56(c).

As described above, the period between when the power failure signal is turned off and when the reset signal is turned off is long enough to execute power failure processing, making it possible to complete power failure processing before the main CPU 64 stops operating.

Next, we will explain the configuration for reducing the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal wiring 464 that connects the power outage monitoring device 461 and the MPU 452.

As already explained, the operation of the main CPU 64 stops when the reset signal falls from a HI state to a LOW state. Therefore, if only the reset signal falls due to the influence of noise without the power failure signal falling beforehand, the operation of the main CPU 64 stops without executing the power failure processing (the processing of steps S1102 to S1104 in the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 55)). In this case, since the power failure flag in the main RAM 66 is not set to "1", a negative judgment is made in step S105 of the main processing (FIG. 26), and the main RAM 66 is cleared (step S108). In addition, the power failure processing is executed when the power failure signal falls from a HI state to a LOW state. Therefore, if the power failure signal falls due to the influence of noise, the power failure processing is executed unnecessarily.

As already explained, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are formed on the solder surface, which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. Also, as already explained with reference to FIG. 7 in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island equipment, the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The game ball supply path for sequentially supplying game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism 73 is located behind the main control board 451. In the game ball supply path, static electricity is generated due to friction between game balls and the ball passage. When this static electricity is suddenly discharged, radiation noise is generated. As already explained, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the main control board 451 from the game ball supply path. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and the power failure signal will be affected by radiation noise generated by the game ball supply path.

As shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b), the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 is provided with a noise countermeasure plane 466 for reducing the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power failure signal. The noise countermeasure plane 466 is a metal (specifically, copper) solid pattern covered with an insulating resist, and is electrically connected to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. The noise countermeasure plane 466 is formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, copper foil). The noise countermeasure plane 466 is provided on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 at a position corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface of the main control board 451, such that the noise countermeasure plane 466 is present between substantially the entire signal wiring 464, 465 and the game ball supply path, along these signal wiring 464, 465, and is wider than these signal wiring 464, 465.

The noise countermeasure plate 466 is located between the game ball supply path, which sequentially supplies game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (Figure 2) in the payout mechanism 73, and the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure plate 466, which is located closer to the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 as viewed from the noise source (game ball supply path), and escapes to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

In a configuration in which the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the main control board 451 from the game ball supply path, a metal noise prevention pad 466 is further provided between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path, thereby improving the ability to block radiation noise generated in the game ball supply path and further reducing the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power outage signal.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

A metal noise prevention plate 466 is provided between the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path for replenishing game balls to the tank 75. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the noise prevention plate 466, which is located closer to the source of the noise (game ball supply path) than the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

By reducing the possibility of the reset signal falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent the operation of the main CPU 64 from stopping without executing power outage processing (the processing of steps S1102 to S1104 in the power outage information storage processing (Figure 55)) due to the reset signal falling only due to the influence of radiation noise without the power outage signal falling beforehand. In addition, by reducing the possibility of the power outage signal falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent power outage processing from being executed unnecessarily.

The noise countermeasure solid 466 is a solid pattern made of metal (specifically, copper) and is electrically connected to the ground plane of the main control board 451. Electrical noise absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 466 escapes to the ground plane. This increases the likelihood that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will be absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 466, and reduces the likelihood that the noise will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

The noise countermeasure solid 466 is arranged to be wider than the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465, and to run along these signal wiring 464, 465 so that the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 face the game ball supply path across the noise countermeasure solid 466. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will reach the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 without being absorbed by the noise countermeasure solid 466. This reduces the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power outage signal.

The MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are insert-mounted components, and the MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are mounted on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. The terminals 462, 463 of the MPU 452 and the terminals 461a to 461d of the power failure monitoring device 461 are soldered to the solder surface, which is the board surface opposite the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. For this reason, the reset signal wiring 464 for the power failure monitoring device 461 to transmit a reset signal to the main control board 451 and the power failure signal wiring 465 for transmitting a power failure signal can be entirely provided on the solder surface of the main control board 451, and a noise countermeasure solid 466 can be provided in the area opposite the entire reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 across the main control board 451 on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. As a result, electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the noise prevention plate 466 from the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 can be blocked by the noise prevention plate 466, which is located before the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (the game ball supply path), before the noise reaches the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465.

The reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the main control board 451 from the game ball supply path. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply path.

The power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted on the main control board 451 on which the MPU 452 is mounted. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted on a board different from the MPU 452, the overall length of the reset signal wiring 464 can be shortened, and the overall length of the power failure signal wiring 465 can be shortened. This reduces the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal and power failure signal.

If the operation of the main CPU 64 stops without the power outage processing being executed, the main RAM 66 is cleared after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the information stored in the main RAM 66 is maintained and gameplay is continued when the operation of the main CPU 64 is not stopped normally.

Eighth embodiment
This embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that surface-mounted components are mounted on the main control board. The following describes the configuration that differs from the seventh embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the seventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 57(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 in this embodiment, and Figure 57(b) is a plan view of the main control board 471 showing an enlarged view of the center area.

As in the first embodiment described above, the main control board 471 is equipped with a large number of surface mount components, such as an MPU 472, first to seventh connectors CN71 to CN77, and various elements. These surface mount components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 471, which serves as the element mounting surface 471a. The terminals of these surface mount components are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a by surface mounting techniques such as reflow soldering.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), an MPU 472 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, and a power outage monitoring device 473 is mounted on the element mounting surface 471a between the MPU 472 and the first to fourth connectors CN71 to CN74.

As in the seventh embodiment, the power failure monitoring device 473 includes a power supply voltage terminal 473a to which a power supply voltage of +36V (DC 36V) is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN71, a drive voltage terminal 473b to which an element drive voltage of DC 5V is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN71, a reset signal terminal 473c for sending a reset signal to the MPU 472, and a power failure signal terminal 473d for sending a power failure signal to the MPU 472. Note that the wiring connecting the first connector CN71 and the power failure monitoring device 473 is omitted from the illustration in Figures 57(a) and 57(b).

As in the seventh embodiment, the MPU 472 has a reset signal receiving terminal 474 for receiving a reset signal and a power failure signal receiving terminal 475 for receiving a power failure signal. The main control board 471 is formed with a reset signal wiring 476 that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset signal receiving terminal 474, and a power failure signal wiring 477 that electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475.

In the main control board 471, near the reset signal terminal 473c in the power failure monitoring device 473 and near the reset signal receiving terminal 474 in the MPU 472, a reset side first through hole 481 and a reset side second through hole 482 are formed for routing a part of the reset signal wiring 476 to the back surface of the board, which is the board surface opposite the element mounting surface 471a in the main control board 471. In addition, in the main control board 471, near the power failure signal terminal 473d in the power failure monitoring device 473 and near the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the MPU 472, a power failure side first through hole 483 and a power failure side second through hole 484 are formed for routing a part of the power failure signal wiring 477 to the back surface of the main control board 471. These through holes 481 to 484 are through holes formed by penetrating the main control board 471 in the board thickness direction, and their inner surfaces are plated with a conductive metal such as copper.

The reset signal wiring 476 includes a reset side first wiring 476a provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the reset signal terminal 473c to the reset side first through hole 481, a reset side second wiring 476b provided on the back surface of the substrate and extending from the reset side first through hole 481 to the reset side second through hole 482, and a reset side third wiring 476c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the reset side second through hole 482 to the reset signal receiving terminal 474. The length of the reset side second wiring 476b is set to be longer than the total length of the reset side first wiring 476a and the reset side third wiring 476c, and most of the reset signal wiring 476 is provided on the back surface of the substrate.

The power failure signal wiring 477 includes a power failure side first wiring 477a provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the power failure signal terminal 473d to the power failure side first through hole 483, a power failure side second wiring 477b provided on the back surface of the board and extending from the power failure side first through hole 483 to the power failure side second through hole 484, and a power failure side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the power failure side second through hole 484 to the power failure signal receiving terminal 475. The length of the power failure side second wiring 477b provided on the back surface of the board is set to be longer than the total length of the power failure side first wiring 477a and the power failure side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a, and most of the power failure signal wiring 477 is present on the back surface of the board.

As already explained in the seventh embodiment above, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Most of the reset signal wiring 476 and power outage signal wiring 477 are provided on the back surface of the board, on the opposite side of the main control board 471 from the game ball supply path for supplying game balls to the tank 75 (Figure 2). This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated by the flow of the game balls.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), a noise countermeasure plane 485 is provided on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 to reduce the effect of radiation noise on the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b. The noise countermeasure plane 485 is a metal (specifically, copper) solid pattern covered with an insulating resist, and is electrically connected to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. It is a GND solid (ground solid). The noise countermeasure plane 485 is formed by etching a metal foil (specifically, copper foil). The noise prevention solid 485 is provided on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 at a position corresponding to the reset side second wiring 476b and the power outage side second wiring 477b formed on the back surface of the main control board 471, such that the noise prevention solid 485 is present between substantially the entirety of these second wirings 476b, 477b and the game ball supply path, and is provided along these second wirings 476b, 477b so as to be wider than these second wirings 476b, 477b.

The noise countermeasure plate 485 is located between the game ball supply path, which sequentially supplies game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (Figure 2) in the payout mechanism 73, and the second wiring 476b, 477b, which occupies the majority of the reset signal wiring 476 and the power outage signal wiring 477. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure plate 485, which is located closer to the second wiring 476b, 477b as viewed from the noise source (game ball supply path), and escapes to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

In a configuration in which the second wiring 476b, 477b is provided on the opposite side of the game ball supply path across the main control board 471, a metal noise prevention pad 485 is further provided between the second wiring 476b, 477b and the game ball supply path, thereby improving the ability to block radiation noise generated in the game ball supply path and further reducing the effect of radiation noise on the reset signal and power outage signal.

As already explained, the MPU 452 and the power failure monitoring device 461 are surface-mounted components, and the reset signal terminal 473c and the power failure signal terminal 473d of the MPU 452, and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 of the power failure monitoring device 461 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. By providing the reset side first wiring 476a that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and the reset side third wiring 476c that electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back surface of the board. This allows the noise countermeasure plane 485 to be present between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball supply path. In addition, by providing the power failure side first wiring 477a, which electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the power failure side first through hole 483, and the power failure side third wiring 477c, which electrically connects the power failure side second through hole 484 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475, on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, on the back surface of the board. This allows the noise countermeasure solid 485 to be present between the power failure side second wiring 477b and the game ball supply path.

By preventing the reset signal from falling due to the influence of radiation noise, the operation of the main CPU 64 is prevented from stopping without executing power outage processing. In addition, by preventing the power outage signal from falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power outage processing from being executed.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

A metal noise prevention mat 485 is provided between the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies the majority of the reset signal wiring 476, and the game ball supply path for supplying game balls to the tank 75. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal will fall due to the influence of radiated noise. This prevents the main CPU 64 from stopping operation without executing the power outage processing.

The reset side second wiring 476b, which accounts for the majority of the reset signal wiring 476, is provided on the back side of the board, on the opposite side of the main control board 471 from the game ball supply path. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply path in the main control board 471 on which surface-mounted components are mounted.

A metal noise prevention mat 485 is provided between the power outage side second wiring 477b, which accounts for the majority of the power outage signal wiring 477, and the game ball supply path. This reduces the possibility that the power outage signal will be affected by radiated noise and fall. This prevents unnecessary power outage processing from being executed.

The power outage side second wiring 477b, which accounts for the majority of the power outage signal wiring 477, is provided on the back side of the board, and this power outage side second wiring 477b is provided on the opposite side of the main control board 471 from the game ball supply path. This reduces the possibility that the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply path.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface-mounted components, and the reset signal terminal 473c of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. By providing the reset side first wiring 476a, which electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and the reset side third wiring 476c, which electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474, on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back side of the board. This allows the noise countermeasure plane 485 to be present between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball supply path.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface-mounted components, and the power failure signal terminal 473d of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. By providing the power failure side first wiring 477a, which electrically connects the power failure signal terminal 473d and the power failure side first through hole 483, and the power failure side third wiring 477c, which electrically connects the power failure side second through hole 484 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475, on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the power failure side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, on the back side of the board. This allows the noise countermeasure plane 485 to be present between the power failure side second wiring 477b and the game ball supply path.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the rear case body 122, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 121. Board position adjustment bosses used for position adjustment when combining the main control board 61 with the front case body 121 are integrally formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the element facing surface 141a of the front side facing plate portion 141 of the front case body 121. The board position adjustment bosses are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 141a in the direction toward the rear side facing plate portion 123. Board fixing boss insertion holes through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the main control board 61. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the horizontal movement of the front case body 121 is restricted when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c, 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm up and down when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole.

In the process of assembling the main control board 61 to the front case body 121, after the board position adjustment bosses are inserted into the board fixing bosses, the main control board 61 is slid toward the front facing plate portion 141. A first board guide portion is provided on the rear facing plate portion 123 side of the lower standing wall 143 of the front case body 121, which contacts the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and guides the main control board 61 upward relative to the front case body 121. With the main control board 61 guided upward relative to the front case body 121 by the first board guide portion, the free ends of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166. In this state, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are located in the vertical center of the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166.

The upper upright wall 142 of the front case body 121 is provided with a second board guide portion that comes into contact with the upper long side 61a of the main control board 61 after it has been guided upward by the first board guide portion, and guides the main control board 61 downward relative to the front case body 121. As the main control board 61 is guided downward relative to the front case body 121 by the second board guide portion, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 move downward from the vertical center of the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are in close proximity to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

The front-side facing plate 141 has cylindrical front-side board fixing bosses integrally formed on the upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right of the element facing surface 141a, which are used to fix the main control board 61 to the front case body 121. The front-side board fixing bosses protrude from the element facing surface 141a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole is formed at the free end of the front-side board fixing boss to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed. The upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right of the main control board 61 have board fixing through holes formed to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the front-side board fixing boss. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front-side board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the rear side of the front case body 121 by being screwed to the front-side board fixing boss from the board back surface 61f side while being guided downward relative to the front case body 121 by the second board guide section.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing bosses and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are vertically misaligned and cannot be fixed with screws before the main control board 61 is guided downward relative to the front case body 121 by the second board guide portion, but are connected and can be fixed with screws after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide portion. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be fixed to the front case body 121 with the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

Even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 121 in this way, the play between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b-159b can be reduced to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into that play.

(2) In the first to third embodiments, instead of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment and boss insertion holes 385 to 388 in the third embodiment) through which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 in the second embodiment and position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 in the third embodiment) are inserted, notches through which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted may be provided at the four corners of the main control board 61 (upper left side, lower left side, upper right side and lower right side in front view). The notches on the upper left side and upper right side are provided from the top end of the main control board 61 to a midway position downward, and the notches on the lower left side and lower right side are provided from the bottom end of the main control board 61 to a midway position upward. These four notches have a horizontal dimension that restricts left-right movement of the front case body 121 when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the notches, and a vertical dimension that allows up-down movement of the front case body 121. With the position adjustment bosses 171-174 inserted into the notches, the lateral movement of the front case body 121 is restricted, while the vertical movement of the front case body 121 is permitted. This allows the front case body 121 to be moved until the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 (the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 in the third embodiment) approach the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

(3) In the first to third embodiments described above, instead of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, which are surface-mounted components, the first to fourth connectors, which are insertion-mounted components, may be mounted on the main control board 61. In this configuration, the first to fourth connectors have rod-shaped pins that extend linearly in a direction penetrating the main control board 61 in the board thickness direction, instead of terminals 111 to 116 having fixing portions 111b to 116b that extend along the element mounting surface 61e.

The first connector has 17 one-end pins arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals where the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the first connector, and 17 other-end pins arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals where the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the first connector. The row of one-end pins and the row of other-end pins are arranged at a predetermined interval (specifically, at intervals where the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) in the short direction of the first connector, with the row of one-end pins arranged on one end side (the lower upright wall portion 101c side) in the short direction, and the row of other-end pins arranged on the other end side (the upper upright wall portion 101b side) in the short direction. The second connector has two pins arranged in the center of the short direction of the second connector. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined interval (specifically, an interval where the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the second connector. The third connector has two pins arranged at the center in the short direction of the third connector. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined interval (specifically, an interval where the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the third connector. The fourth connector has ten one-end side pins arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, an interval where the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector as the arrangement direction, and ten other-end side pins arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, an interval where the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector as the arrangement direction. The row of pins on one end and the row of pins on the other end are arranged at a predetermined interval in the short direction of the fourth connector (specifically, an interval where the distance between the pin axes is 2.54 mm), with the row of pins on one end being arranged on one end side of the short direction (the side of the lower standing wall 104c) and the row of pins on the other end being arranged on the other end side of the short direction (the side of the upper standing wall 104b).

The pins of the first to fourth connectors are soldered to the back surface 61f of the board while being inserted into through holes formed by penetrating the main control board 61 in the board thickness direction, and are not exposed on the element mounting surface 61e side. Even if the pins of the first to fourth connectors are not exposed on the element mounting surface 61e side in this way, if a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the play between the first to fourth connectors and the periphery of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279 in the second embodiment, and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment), there is a risk of tampering such as using the tampering tool to scrape off the resist covering the wiring provided on the element mounting surface 61e, exposing the wiring to the surface, and contacting the tampering tool with the exposed wiring.

In contrast, in the first embodiment, as already explained, the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b are closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c so as to reduce the play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159. In the second embodiment, as already explained, the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b are closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c so as to reduce the play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278. As already described, in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b are close to the lower standing walls 101c to 104c so as to reduce the play existing between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the first to third embodiments, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a fraudulent tool into the play existing between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b (the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b in the second embodiment and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b in the third embodiment). This reduces the possibility of such fraudulent conduct being carried out on wiring that is electrically connected to one end pin of the first connector, the pin of the second connector, the pin of the third connector, and the one end pin of the fourth connector.

(4) In the first to third embodiments, the fixing portions 113b, 114b of the terminals 113, 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 may extend from a position higher than the center in the vertical direction of the housings 102, 103 (closer to the upper standing wall portions 102b, 103b) to straddle the lower standing wall portions 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral portions 157b, 158b along the element mounting surface 61e. Even in this configuration, if a conductive tampering tool such as a wire is inserted between the lower standing wall portions 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral portions 157b, 158b (lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b in the second embodiment, and lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b in the third embodiment), the tampering tool may come into contact with the fixing portions 113b, 114b. In contrast, in the first embodiment, as already described, the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b are closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c so as to reduce the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. In the second embodiment, as already described, the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b are closer to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c so as to reduce the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. As already explained, in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b are close to the lower standing walls 101c-104c so that the play between the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 is small. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which a fraud tool comes into contact with the fixed portions 113b, 114b.

(5) In the first to third embodiments, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may have a configuration in which either the left side play or the right side play is made smaller than the other. Specifically, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 and the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 and boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment, and position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 and boss insertion holes 385 to 388 in the third embodiment) are configured such that the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 276 to 278 in the second embodiment). 271-274, and in the third embodiment, the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336-339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365), guide the front case body 121 (front case body 232 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 in the third embodiment) so that the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are positioned to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159.

If a conductive tampering tool such as a flat-head screwdriver is inserted into the play that exists between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the periphery of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279, and in the third embodiment, the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365), there is a risk that the tampering tool may be used to scrape away the resist covering the wiring on the element mounting surface 61e, exposing the wiring to the surface and then causing the tampering tool to come into contact with the exposed wiring, resulting in a tampering act. In response to this, by providing a configuration that reduces the play that exists between the left standing wall portions 101d-104d of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the left periphery of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159, the wiring patterns disposed around the left side of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 among the wiring patterns provided on the element mounting surface 61e can be protected preferentially from the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

(6) In the first to third embodiments, instead of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment, and boss insertion holes 385 to 388 in the third embodiment) formed as long holes extending in the vertical direction in the main control board 61, the boss insertion holes may be formed as long holes extending in a diagonal direction. Specifically, at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61, boss insertion holes are formed through the main control board 61 in the plate thickness direction and through which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 in the second embodiment, and position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 in the third embodiment) are inserted. These four boss insertion holes are long holes extending in a direction sloping downward toward the right. Note that these four boss insertion holes may be formed as long holes extending in a direction sloping downward toward the left.

With the position adjustment bosses 171-174 inserted into the boss insertion holes, the front case body 121 (front case body 232 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 in the third embodiment) can move diagonally upward to the left and diagonally downward to the right relative to the rear case body 122 (rear case body 234 in the second embodiment, rear case body 313 in the third embodiment). With the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 present in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 (first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 and first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365 in the third embodiment), the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159, and then the front case body 121 is moved to the rear case. By moving the base body 122 diagonally upward to the left, the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 (the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365 in the third embodiment) can be brought closer to the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4. This makes it possible to reduce the play that exists between the lower standing walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159.

In this way, even if the boss insertion holes are configured as long holes extending diagonally, the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 can be reduced, reducing the possibility of fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent tool such as a wire into that play.

(7) In the first to third embodiments, the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h may be provided on the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in a state in which the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are initially positioned lower than the center in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274; in the third embodiment, the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365). In this configuration, since the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on the upper upright walls 101b to 104b, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are positioned lower than the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction, and then the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Then, while maintaining this positional relationship, the front case body 121 (front case body 232 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 in the third embodiment) can be slid toward the rear facing plate portion 123 (rear facing plate portion 235 in the second embodiment, rear facing plate portion 315 in the third embodiment) to screw the front case body 121 to the rear case body 122.

As a result, the process of moving the front case body 121 upward relative to the rear case body 122 after inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 can be omitted, and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be brought into close proximity to the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment).

(8) In the first to third embodiments, a signal that would pay out a relatively large number of game balls if a fraudulent act of manipulating a signal is committed may be assigned to the one-end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, which is preferentially protected from the fraudulent act, while a signal that would pay out a relatively small number of game balls if a fraudulent act is committed may be assigned to the other-end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. As already explained in the first to third embodiments, the one-end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 is preferentially protected from a fraudulent act of manipulating a signal by contacting a conductive fraud tool, compared to the other-end terminal 116. Since the number of one-end terminals 115 in the fourth connector CN4 is limited, the number of signals assigned to the one-end terminal 115 is also limited.

In this configuration, the detection signals of the first to third winning port detection sensors 42a to 44a and the special electric detection sensor 45a are assigned to the one end terminal 115, while the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is assigned to the other end terminal 116. As already explained in the first embodiment, even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game balls are not dispensed. On the other hand, if a ball enters the general winning port 31, 10 prize balls are dispensed, and if a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are dispensed. Therefore, if a fraudulent act of fraudulently manipulating the detection signals of the first to third winning port detection sensors 42a to 44a is performed continuously to make it appear as if a ball entered the general winning port 31, the 10 prize balls will be dispensed continuously. In addition, if fraudulent acts are repeatedly performed to manipulate the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a so that a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, the payout of 15 prize balls will be performed continuously. In such cases, the economic loss suffered by the gaming hall in a short period of time will be large.

By assigning a detection signal that will result in a relatively large number of game balls (e.g., 10 or more game balls) being paid out in the event of fraudulent signal manipulation to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, it is possible to prevent fraudulent behavior that would cause an arcade to incur large economic losses in a short period of time.

(9) In the first to third embodiments, among the signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, only the signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, which will cause a transition to a state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the ball entry section, may be assigned to terminals 113 to 115, which are preferentially protected from fraudulent manipulation of signals in the second to fourth connectors CN2 to CN4. As signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, there are detection signals from the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the first operating hole detection sensor 46a, the second operating hole detection sensor 47a, the out hole detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a.

In this configuration, of these detection signals, the detection signals of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and the gate detection sensor 49a, which are related to the transition to a state advantageous to the player, are assigned to the terminals 113-115, which are given priority protection from fraudulent activity. On the other hand, the detection signals of the first to third winning port detection sensors 42a-44a, the special power detection sensor 45a, and the out port detection sensor 48a, which are not related to the transition to a state advantageous to the player, are assigned to the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. This other end terminal 116 is not the subject of priority protection from fraudulent activity.

As already explained in the first embodiment, a winning lottery is held with the winning entry into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. If the winning lottery based on the winning entry into the first operating port 33 results in a big win or a small win, the game mode transitions to the open/close execution mode. Also, if the winning lottery based on the winning entry into the second operating port 34 results in a big win or a small win, the game mode transitions to the open/close execution mode. The open/close execution mode is a game mode in which the winning entry into the special electric winning device 32 is possible, and is an advantageous state for the player. As already explained in the first embodiment, an internal lottery is held with the winning entry into the through gate 35 as a trigger. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning of the electric role opening and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is terminated, the game mode transitions to the normal electric opening state. The normal electric opening state is a state in which the normal electric role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner and the winning entry into the second operating port 34 is possible, and is an advantageous state for the player.

Of the signals related to whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section, only the signals related to whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section, which will result in a transition to a state advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the ball entry section, are assigned to terminals 113-115, which are preferentially protected from fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals in the second to fourth connectors CN2-CN4, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals to illegally create a state advantageous to the player.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, the special power drive signal transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special power drive unit 32c and the normal power drive signal transmitted from the main control device 60 to the normal power drive unit 34c may be assigned to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the special power open detection sensor 32b and the normal power open detection sensor 34b may be omitted.

When a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting a special electric drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is committed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is illegally put into an open state, and a prize is illegally generated in the special electric prize winning device 32. In a configuration that does not have a special electric open detection sensor 32b, the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation in which a prize is illegally generated in the special electric prize winning device 32. When a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting a special electric drive signal to the normal electric drive unit 34c is committed, the normal electric role 34a is illegally put into an open state, and a prize is illegally generated in the second operating port 34. In a configuration that does not have a normal electric open detection sensor 34b, the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation in which a prize is illegally generated in the second operating port 34.

In response to this, the special power drive signal and the normal power drive signal are assigned to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, thereby preventing fraudulent manipulation of the special power drive signal and the normal power drive signal. Note that in this configuration, only one of the special power drive signal and the normal power drive signal may be assigned to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the other may be assigned to the other end terminal 116.

(11) In the first to third embodiments described above, all wiring for transmitting external signals to the gaming hall's management computer via the external terminal board 79 may be configured to be assigned to the one-end terminal 111 in the first connector CN1 that is preferentially protected from fraudulent activity. This prevents the transmission of external signals to the gaming hall's management computer from being fraudulently blocked, which could result in the management computer being unable to accurately grasp the status of the payout of gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, the wiring patterns formed on the element mounting surface 61e to electrically connect the fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b at the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 to the electronic components mounted on the main control board 61 are It may be configured to extend across the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first-fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 (the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first-fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first-fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365 in the third embodiment).

The surface of the wiring pattern is covered with resist, but if the resist is scraped off, a conductive tampering tool such as a wire inserted into the gap between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b may come into electrical contact with the wiring pattern. In contrast, in the first embodiment, as already described, the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c so that the gap between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 is small. In the second embodiment, as already explained, the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c so that the play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 is small. In the third embodiment, as already explained, the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b are close to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c so that the play between the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4 and the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362-365 is small.

Therefore, the wiring patterns electrically connecting the fixing parts 111b, 113b to 115b at the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 to the electronic components mounted on the main control board 61 are arranged in the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes. Even in a configuration in which the wiring pattern extends across the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b of the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b (lower peripheral portions 275b-278b in the second embodiment, and lower peripheral portions 362b-365b in the third embodiment), it is possible to prevent a tampering tool inserted into the gap that exists between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b-159b from making electrical contact with the wiring pattern.

(13) In the first to third embodiments, the occurrence of a V win may be determined based on the detection of a game ball passing through the V win passage area, and a signal line for a detection signal for detecting a game ball passing through the V win passage area may be assigned to one of the terminals 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 on the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 on the third connector CN3, and the terminal 115 on one end of the fourth connector CN4. Specifically, a variable display unit is provided to include the center of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area in the game area PA where the game ball can flow down is divided into an upper area, a left area and a right area that are continuous below the upper area, and a lower area that is continuous below the left area and the right area. When the launch operation device 28 is rotated within the first range, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area → left area → lower area, and when the launch operation device 28 is rotated within the second range, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area → right area → lower area.

The lower region is provided with a first operating section that can win only when the game ball flows down the left region of the left and right regions. The right region is provided with a second operating section having an induction unit. A game ball flowing down the right region will not enter the second operating section when the induction unit is in a non-induction state, but will enter the second operating section when the induction unit is in an induction state. A through winning section is provided vertically above the second operating section in the right region, a special electric winning device is provided downstream of the second operating section, and a distribution winning device is provided below the special electric winning device. A game ball that wins in the through winning section can win in the second operating section, the special electric winning device, or the distribution winning device. The through winning section, the special electric winning device, and the distribution winning device can win only when the game ball flows down the right region of the left and right regions. When a ball enters the first operating unit, the second operating unit, the distribution winning device, or the special electric winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, but even if a ball enters the through winning section, no game balls are paid out. A lottery is held when a ball enters the through winning section, and if the result of the lottery is a win in the induction execution state, the induction unit of the second operating unit transitions to an induction execution state in a predetermined manner.

A winning lottery is held based on the occurrence of a winning entry in the first or second operating unit. If either a 6R jackpot result or a 15R jackpot result is selected in the winning lottery, the game moves to an open/close execution mode in which a winning entry in the special winning device is possible after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is completed. If either the first to third small win results is selected in the winning lottery held based on a winning entry in the second operating unit, the game moves to a distribution execution mode in which a winning entry in the distribution winning device is possible after the game round corresponding to the small win result is completed. The distribution winning device is equipped with a distribution inlet that is large enough for game balls to pass through, and a distribution side opening/closing member that switches the distribution inlet between a closed state in which game balls cannot pass through and an open state in which game balls can pass through. The game balls that win the distribution inlet are led to a branch passage formed in the base body of the distribution winning device. The branch passage includes an upstream passage area, a discharge passage area set to be continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area, and a V winning passage area that is branched from the middle of the discharge passage area and leads the game ball to a side different from the discharge passage area. At the branch point of the discharge passage area to the V winning passage area, a switching piece is provided that is arranged in a retracted position in the first state and arranged in a V guide position in the second state. In the first state, the game ball that flows into the branch passage flows down the discharge passage area without being guided to the V winning passage area, and is detected by a count detection sensor provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece. By entering the second state, the game ball that flows into the branch passage is guided by the switching piece and flows into the V winning passage area, and is detected by a V winning detection sensor provided in the V winning passage area. In the distribution execution mode, the game ball is basically detected by the V winning detection sensor.

In either case where a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor or where a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device are paid out. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without a game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor, the opening and closing execution mode does not occur. As already explained in the first to third embodiments, the one-end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the signal set in the one-end terminal 115 using a conductive fraud tool such as a wire. In this configuration, the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor is input to the main CPU 64 via the one-end terminal 115. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor to illegally generate the opening and closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode. In addition, the signal line of the detection signal of the V winning detection sensor may be assigned to one of the terminals 111 on one end of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, which are preferentially protected from fraudulent acts using conductive fraud tools.

(14) In the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the rear case body 234, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 232. Board position adjustment bosses used for position adjustment when combining the main control board 61 with the front case body 232 are integrally formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the element facing surface 261a of the front side facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232. The board position adjustment bosses are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 261a in the direction toward the rear side facing plate portion 235. Board fixing boss insertion holes through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the main control board 61. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the horizontal movement of the front case body 232 is restricted when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c, 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the front case body 232 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm up and down when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole.

As already explained in the second embodiment above, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232. In the process of assembling the main control board 61 to the front case body 232 to which the connector cover 233 is fixed, after the board position adjustment bosses are inserted into the board fixing bosses, the main control board 61 is slid toward the front facing plate portion 261. The lower standing wall 263 of the front case body 232 is provided on the rear facing plate portion 235 side of the lower standing wall 263 with a first board guide portion that comes into contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and guides the main control board 61 upward relative to the front case body 232. When the main control board 61 is guided upward relative to the front case body 232 by the first board guide portion, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the free ends of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293. In this state, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are located in the vertical center of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293.

A second board guide portion is provided on the upper upright wall 262 of the front case body 232, which contacts the upper long side 61a of the main control board 61 after it has been guided upward by the first board guide portion, and guides the main control board 61 downward relative to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233. As the main control board 61 is guided downward relative to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide portion, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 move downward from the vertical centers of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 move downward from the vertical centers of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293. As a result, the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first through fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 are in close proximity to the lower upright walls 101c-104c of the first through fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

The front-side facing plate 261 has cylindrical front-side board fixing bosses integrally formed on the left upper, left lower, right lower and right upper parts of the element facing surface 261a, which are used to fix the main control board 61 to the front case body 232. The front-side board fixing bosses protrude from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes are formed at the free ends of the front-side board fixing bosses to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed. The main control board 61 has board fixing through holes formed on the left upper, left lower, right lower and right upper parts of the main control board 61 to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the front-side board fixing bosses. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front-side board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the rear side of the front case body 232 by screwing it to the front-side board fixing bosses from the board back surface 61f side while being guided downward relative to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide part.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing bosses and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are vertically misaligned and cannot be fixed with screws before the main control board 61 is guided downward relative to the front case body 232 and connector cover 233 by the second board guide portion, but are connected and can be fixed with screws after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide portion. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be fixed to the front case body 232 with the lower peripheral portions 275b-278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275-278 in close proximity to the lower standing wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

Even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 232 in this way, the play between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b-278b can be reduced to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into that play.

(15) In the third embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the rear case body 313, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 312. Board position adjustment bosses used for position adjustment when combining the main control board 61 with the front case body 312 are integrally formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the element facing surface 351a of the front side facing plate portion 351 of the front case body 312. The board position adjustment bosses are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 351a in the direction toward the rear side facing plate portion 315. Board fixing boss insertion holes through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right) of the main control board 61. The horizontal dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the horizontal movement of the front case body 312 is restricted when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c, 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to be approximately 2 mm larger than the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 2 mm up and down when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole.

As already explained in the third embodiment, the connector corresponding plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. In the process of assembling the main control board 61 with the connector corresponding plate 314 fixed to the front case body 312, the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss, and then the main control board 61 is slid toward the front side facing plate portion 351. This sliding causes the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to be inserted into the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 to be inserted into the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376. After that, the main control board 61 is manually slid upward relative to the front case body 312 and the connector corresponding plate 314 until the board position adjustment boss abuts against the upper end of the board fixing boss. As a result, the lower periphery 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 is close to the lower upright wall portions 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

The front-side facing plate 351 has cylindrical front-side board fixing bosses integrally formed on the left upper, left lower, right lower and right upper parts of the element facing surface 351a, which are used to fix the main control board 61 to the front case body 312. The front-side board fixing bosses protrude from the element facing surface 351a toward the main control board 61, and screw holes are formed at the free ends of the front-side board fixing bosses to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed. The main control board 61 has board fixing through holes formed on the left upper, left lower, right lower and right upper parts of the main control board 61 to allow the main control board 61 to be screwed to the front-side board fixing bosses. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front-side board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the rear side of the front case body 312 by being screwed to the front-side board fixing bosses from the board back surface 61f side while being guided downward relative to the front case body 312 by the second board guide part.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing bosses and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are vertically misaligned and cannot be fixed with screws before the main control board 61 is slid upward until the board position adjustment boss abuts against the upper end of the board fixing boss insertion hole, but after the main control board 61 has slid upward, they are connected and can be fixed with screws. Therefore, the main control board 61 can be fixed to the front case body 312 with the lower peripheral portions 362b-365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 in close proximity to the lower upright walls 101c-104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4.

Even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 312 in this way, the play between the lower upright walls 101c-104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b-365b can be reduced to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire into that play.

(16) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, instead of the fraud detection line 406, a power supply line that supplies operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided. The GND line 405 and the power supply line are provided close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, when operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, if a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 and the fraud tool causes the GND line 405 and the power supply line to become conductive, a state is created in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. This stops the operation of the main CPU 64.

Instead of the numerous tamper detection contacts 408, the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 is provided with numerous power supply contacts. The power supply contacts have solder bulges that bulge from the solder surface 401f by approximately 1 mm. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. The solder bulges of the power supply contacts bulge from the solder surface 401f, increasing the possibility of contact with a tamper tool when the tamper tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f side. When operating power is supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, if a conductive tamper tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 and comes into contact with one or more GND contacts 407 and one or more power supply contacts, the GND line 405 and the power supply line are made conductive, creating a state in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. This causes the operation of the main CPU 64 to stop.

In this way, by providing a power supply line on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 and providing a solder bulge of the power supply contact on the solder surface 401f, the operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped if fraud is committed by bringing a fraudulent tool close to the element mounting surface 401e or solder surface 401f of the main control board 401. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing in a state where fraud using a fraudulent tool has been committed.

(17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact 407, and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact 408 may be provided at a location other than the peripheral portion of the main control board 401. For example, the combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact 407, and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact 408 may be provided around the MPU 402. Specifically, on the element mounting surface 401e, a GND line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is provided around the MPU 402 at a predetermined interval (for example, approximately 2 mm) from the pins 411 to 413 of the MPU 402, and a fraud detection line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is provided in parallel with the GND line at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1 mm) from the GND line on the opposite side of the MPU 402. The GND line and the fraud detection line are provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the MPU 402. Note that the GND line and the fraud detection line may be provided only partially around the MPU 402.

The surfaces of the GND line and the fraud detection line are not covered with resist and are exposed. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver into the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 and attempting to contact the MPU 402, the fraud tool brings the GND line and the fraud detection line into a conductive state, causing a voltage drop on the fraud detection line. As in the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage on the fraud detection line, and when it detects that a voltage drop has occurred, it determines that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the main control board 401 has been committed.

On the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, a plurality of GND contacts are provided at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval where the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contacts is approximately 3 mm) along a GND line provided on the element mounting surface 401e, which is the board surface opposite to the solder surface 401f. As in the fourth embodiment, the GND contacts include through holes that penetrate the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction and have their inner circumferential surfaces plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), lands provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through holes on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f, and solder bulges that bulge from the solder surface 401f. All of the GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by the through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, increasing the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver will come into contact with the solder bulge if the tampering tool is brought close to the solder surface 401f.

On the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, a plurality of fraud detection contacts are provided at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval where the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts is about 3 mm) along a fraud detection line provided on the element mounting surface 401e, which is the board surface opposite to the solder surface 401f. As in the fourth embodiment, the fraud detection contacts include a through hole that penetrates the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction and has an inner circumferential surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), a land provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 401e and the solder surface 401f, and a solder bulge that bulges from the solder surface 401f. All the fraud detection contacts are electrically connected to the fraud detection line by the through hole. The solder bulge bulges out about 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, and when a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the solder surface 401f, the possibility that the fraud tool will come into contact with the solder bulge is increased.

The wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 402 to other insertable components mounted on the main control board 401 is formed on the solder surface 401f through the gaps between the GND contact portion and the tamper detection contact portion. When a tampering attempt is made to insert a conductive tampering tool into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 and bring it into contact with the pins 411-413 of the MPU 402, the tampering tool comes into contact with both the GND contact portion and the tampering detection contact portion, resulting in electrical continuity between the GND line and the tampering detection line, and the voltage of the tampering detection line drops. This allows the main CPU 64 to identify that a tampering attempt has been made by bringing a conductive tampering tool close to the main control board 401.

In this way, by configuring the main control board 401 so that a combination of the GND line and GND contact part, and the fraud detection line and fraud detection contact part are provided around the MPU 402, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts, particularly those involving bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the MPU 402, among the insert-mounted components mounted on the main control board 401. In addition to the configuration of the fourth embodiment in which a combination of the GND line 405 and GND contact part 407, and the fraud detection line 406 and fraud detection contact part 408 are provided around the main control board 401, a configuration in which a combination of the GND line and GND contact part, and the fraud detection line and fraud detection contact part are provided around the MPU 402, as in this configuration, may also be used.

(18) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 (in the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection line 436), the main CPU 64 may be configured to monitor the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406. In this configuration, when operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a current of, for example, 5 mA flows through the fraud detection line 406 as a fraud detection current. When the GND line 405 (in the sixth embodiment, the GND line 435) and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver, a state occurs in which the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 falls below a reference current amount (for example, 2.5 mA) or no current flows through the fraud detection line 406. The main CPU 64 monitors the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, and when it detects that the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 has fallen below the reference current amount or that no current is flowing through the fraud detection line 406, it identifies that fraud has been committed using a conductive fraud tool. In this way, even when the main CPU 64 is configured to monitor the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, it is possible to discover fraud by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the main control board 61.

(19) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the GND line 405 is provided around the entire circumference of the main control board 401 (main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment), the GND line 405 may be provided only on a portion of the periphery of the main control board 401. For example, the main control board 401 may be configured such that a GND line and a right GND line are provided on the left and right peripheries of the main control board 401, which is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle, while no GND lines are provided on the top and bottom peripheries of the main control board 401. The left GND line extends linearly along the left side 401c (left side 431c in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the top to the bottom of the left side 401c at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm), and the right GND line extends linearly along the right side 401d (right side 431d in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the top to the bottom of the right side 401d at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm).

In this configuration, the fraud detection line 406 (fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment) includes an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The left fraud detection line is spaced approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line, and the right fraud detection line is spaced approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line. These left fraud detection line and right fraud detection line extend linearly in the vertical direction from the top to the bottom of the main control board 401 with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm).

As described above, no GND line is provided on the upper and lower peripheries of the main control board 401. This makes it possible to provide the fraud detection lines near the upper edge 401a and the lower edge 401b of the main control board 401. The upper fraud detection line extends linearly in the left-right direction with a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) along the upper edge 401a (upper edge 431a in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the upper end of the left fraud detection line to the upper end of the right fraud detection line. The lower fraud detection line extends linearly in the left-right direction with a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) along the lower edge 401b (lower edge 431b in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the lower end of the left fraud detection line to the lower end of the right fraud detection line. These upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines are electrically connected.

In a configuration in which the vertical dimension of the main control board 401 is smaller than its horizontal dimension, a GND line and a tamper detection line are provided on the left and right peripheral parts of the main control board 401, while only a tamper detection line is provided on the top and bottom peripheral parts of the main control board 401. This allows for a configuration in which tampering can be detected by inserting a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver from the side of the main control device 60 and approaching the left or right side of the main control board 61 when the tampering tool establishes electrical continuity between the GND line and the tampering detection line, while also providing a wide vertical area in the main control board 401 in which insert-mounted components or surface-mounted components can be placed. This configuration is not limited to a configuration in which GND lines are provided only on the left and right edges of the main control board 401. By providing GND lines on one to three of the four edges of the main control board 401 on the top, bottom, left, and right, and not providing GND lines on the remaining edges, a larger area can be secured on the main control board in which insertion-mounted components or surface-mounted components can be mounted, compared to a configuration in which GND lines and tamper detection lines are provided on all edges of the main control board on the top, bottom, left, and right.

(20) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the GND line may not be provided on the peripheral portion of the main control board 61 that is located on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13 among the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral portions. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the first embodiment, the inner frame 13 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11 with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. Also, as already described in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). When the main control device 60 is mounted on the inner frame 13, the right sides 401d, 431d of the main control boards 401, 431 are located on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the left sides 401c, 431c are located on the rotation tip side of the inner frame 13. In the case of fraudulent activity in which a conductive fraud tool such as a flat-head screwdriver is inserted from the side of the main control device 60 without removing the main control device 60 from the inner frame 13 to bring it close to the main control boards 401, 431, if an attempt is made to insert the fraud tool from the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13 (the right side 401d, 431d side of the main control boards 401, 431), it will be necessary to open the inner frame 13 wider relative to the outer frame 11 compared to inserting the fraud tool from other directions (the upper side 401a, 431a side, the lower side 401b, 431b side, or the left side 401c, 431c side of the main control boards 401, 431). For this reason, fraudulent activity of inserting a fraud tool into the side of the main control board 401, 431 and bringing it close to the main control board 401, 431 is likely to be carried out from the upper side 401a, 431a, the lower side 401b, 431b, or the left side 401c, 431c of the main control board 401, 431.

In this configuration, the upper, lower and right peripheries of the main control board 401, 431 are provided with a GND line and a fraud detection line, while the right periphery of the main control board 401, 431 is provided with only a fraud detection line and no GND line. The main control board 401, 431 is provided with an upper GND line, a lower GND line and a left GND line. The upper GND line extends linearly along the upper edge 401a, 431a of the main control board 401, 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper edge 401a, 431a at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm), and the lower GND line extends linearly along the lower edge 401b, 431b of the main control board 401 at a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm) from the left end to the right end of the lower edge 401b, 431b. Additionally, the left GND line extends linearly along the left sides 401c, 431c of the main control boards 401, 431 from the top to the bottom of the left sides 401c, 431c with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm).

The main control board 401, 431 is provided with an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The upper fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm below the upper GND line, and the lower fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm above the lower GND line. The left fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the right of the left GND line. As described above, no GND line is provided on the right peripheral portion of the main control board 61. For this reason, it is possible to provide the fraud detection line near the right sides 401d, 431d of the main control boards 401, 431. The right fraud detection line extends linearly in the vertical direction from the right end of the upper fraud detection line to the right end of the lower fraud detection line with a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) along the right sides 401d, 431d of the main control board 401. The upper fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) and extends linearly from the top of the left fraud detection line to the top of the right fraud detection line, while the lower fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) and extends linearly from the bottom of the left fraud detection line to the bottom of the right fraud detection line. The left fraud detection line also has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm) and extends linearly from the left end of the upper fraud detection line to the left end of the lower fraud detection line. These upper, lower, left and right fraud detection lines are electrically connected.

Only a tamper detection line is provided on the right edge of the main control board 401, 431, and no GND line is provided. This allows the area in the main control board 401, 431 in which insertion-mounted components or surface-mounted components can be mounted to be expanded in the left-right direction of the main control board 401, 431 compared to a configuration in which a GND line and a tamper detection line are provided on the right edge of the main control board 401, 431.

In this manner, in a configuration in which the right side 401d, 431d of the main control board 401, 431 is the base end side of the rotation of the inner frame 13 and the left side 401c, 431c is the tip end side of the rotation of the inner frame 13, a GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the upper, lower and left side edges of the main control board 401, 431, while the right side edge of the main control board 401, 431 is provided with only a fraud detection line and no GND line, it is possible to ensure a wide area on the main control board 401, 431 in which insertion-mounted components or surface-mounted components can be mounted while preventing a decrease in the possibility of detecting fraudulent activity.

(21) In the above fourth to sixth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact parts 407, 437 are provided on the outer periphery of the main control boards 401, 431 relative to the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438, the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438 may be provided on the outer periphery of the main control boards 401, 431 relative to the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact parts 407, 437. The GND lines 405, 435 and GND contacts 407, 437 are arranged in parallel with the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and fraud detection contacts 408, 438, and when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the main control board 401, 431, the fraud tool can be in contact with both the GND lines 405, 435 and GND contacts 407, 437, and the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and fraud detection contacts 408, 438, making it possible for the main CPU 64 to detect the fraudulent act.

(22) In the sixth embodiment, a power supply line that supplies operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided instead of the fraud detection line 406. The periphery of the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is doubly surrounded by an outer GND line 435 and an inner power supply line. The GND line 435 and the power supply line are provided close to each other and are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed on the surface.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 is provided with a number of power supply contacts instead of a number of fraud detection contacts 438. All of the power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. The power supply contacts have a solder bulge that bulges out from the solder surface 401f by approximately 1 mm. All of the power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. The solder bulge of the power supply contacts bulges out from the solder surface 401f, increasing the possibility of contact with a fraud tool when the fraud tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e. When operating power is supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, if a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 and comes into contact with one or more GND contacts 437 and one or more power supply contacts, the GND line 435 and the power supply line are conductive, creating a state in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. This stops the operation of the main CPU 64.

In this way, by providing a power supply line on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 and providing a power supply contact on the element mounting surface 431e, the operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped if fraud is committed by bringing a cheating tool close to the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing in a state where fraud using a cheating tool has been committed.

(23) In the sixth embodiment, the combination of the GND line 435 and the GND contact 437, and the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection contact 438 may be provided at a location other than the peripheral portion of the main control board 431. For example, the combination of the GND line and the GND contact, and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact may be provided around the MPU 432. Specifically, on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, a GND line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is provided around the MPU mounting corresponding area corresponding to the area where the MPU 432 is mounted on the element mounting surface 431e, at a predetermined interval (for example, approximately 2 mm) from the MPU mounting corresponding area, and a fraud detection line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is provided in parallel with the GND line at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1 mm) from the GND line on the opposite side from the MPU mounting corresponding area. The GND line and the tamper detection line are provided so as to completely surround the periphery of the MPU 432. Note that the GND line and the tamper detection line may be provided only partially around the periphery of the area compatible with mounting the MPU.

On the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, a plurality of GND contacts are provided at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval where the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contacts is approximately 3 mm) along a GND line provided on the board back surface 431f, which is the board surface on the opposite side of the element mounting surface 431e. As in the sixth embodiment, the GND contacts include through holes that penetrate the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction and have their inner surfaces plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), lands provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through holes on the element mounting surface 431e and the board back surface 431f, and solder bulges that bulge from the element mounting surface 431e. All of the GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by the through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, increasing the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver will come into contact with the solder bulge when the tampering tool is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e.

On the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, a plurality of fraud detection contacts are provided at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval where the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contacts is about 3 mm) along a fraud detection line provided on the board back surface 431f, which is the board surface opposite to the element mounting surface 431e. As in the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection contacts include a through hole that penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction and has an inner circumferential surface plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper), a land provided in a circular shape on the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 431e and the board back surface 431f, and a solder bulge that bulges from the element mounting surface 431e. All of the fraud detection contacts are electrically connected to the fraud detection line by the through hole. The solder bulge bulges out about 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, and when a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that the fraud tool will come into contact with the solder bulge is increased.

The wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 432 and other insert-mounted components mounted on the main control board 431 is formed through the gap between the GND contact portion and the fraud detection contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. When a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a conductive fraud tool into the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 to contact the terminals 441 to 443 of the MPU 432, the fraud tool comes into contact with both the GND contact portion and the fraud detection contact portion, so that the GND line and the fraud detection line are in a conductive state, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. As in the sixth embodiment, the main side CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line, and when it is determined that the voltage drop has occurred, it identifies that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the main control board 431 has been committed. This allows the main side CPU 64 to identify that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the main control board 431 has been committed.

In this way, by configuring the main control board 431 so that a combination of the GND line and GND contact portion, and the fraud detection line and fraud detection contact portion are provided around the MPU 432, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts, particularly those involving bringing a conductive fraud tool close to the MPU 432, among the surface-mounted components mounted on the main control board 431. In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment in which a combination of the GND line 435 and GND contact portion 437, and the fraud detection line 436 and fraud detection contact portion 438 are provided around the main control board 431, a configuration in which a combination of the GND line and GND contact portion, and the fraud detection line and fraud detection contact portion are provided around the MPU 402, as in this configuration, may also be used.

(24) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, instead of the noise countermeasure solids 466, 485, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of noise countermeasure wirings electrically connected to ground are provided in a part of the area corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 (the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b in the eighth embodiment) formed on the solder surface of the main control board 451, 471 on the element mounting surface 451a, 471a of the main control board 451, 471. Specifically, these noise countermeasure wirings are wirings having a width of approximately 1.5 mm formed by etching metal foil (specifically copper foil). A plurality of such noise countermeasure wirings are formed between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path. At least a portion of the electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the noise countermeasure wiring that is located closer to the source of the noise (the game ball supply path) than the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465, and escapes to the ground that is electrically connected to the noise countermeasure wiring. This reduces the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

By configuring the device so that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by multiple anti-noise wiring, it is possible to form wiring patterns other than the anti-noise wiring in the areas of the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a that correspond to the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface. This allows for increased freedom in wiring design on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a while providing noise countermeasures for the reset signal and power failure signal.

(25) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465 (the reset side second wiring 476b and the power failure side second wiring 477b in the eighth embodiment) may be provided at separate positions on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a of the main control boards 451 and 471, and a noise countermeasure plane may be provided for each of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power failure signal wiring 465. Specifically, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, a reset side noise countermeasure plane is provided in an area corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 provided on the solder surface. Also, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, a power failure side noise countermeasure plane is provided in an area corresponding to the power failure signal wiring 465 provided on the solder surface. These noise countermeasure planes are formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil) and are electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451 and 471.

The reset side noise countermeasures solid exists between substantially the entirety of the reset signal wiring 464 and the game ball supply path. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the reset side noise countermeasures solid, which exists closer to the reset signal wiring 464 than the source of the noise (the game ball supply path). This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal.

The power outage side noise countermeasure solid is located between substantially the entire power outage signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply path. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the power outage side noise countermeasure solid, which is located closer to the power outage signal wiring 465 than the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (the game ball supply path). This reduces the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the power outage signal. Note that in this configuration, only one of the reset side noise countermeasure solid and the power outage side noise countermeasure solid may be provided.

(26) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the power failure monitoring devices 461, 473 are mounted on the main control boards 451, 471, the power failure monitoring devices 461, 473 may be mounted on a power failure monitoring board different from the main control boards 451, 471. Specifically, the main control boards 451, 471 and the power failure monitoring boards are electrically connected by a plurality of signal lines. A male connector is provided at the end of the signal line connecting the main control board 451 and the power failure monitoring board on the main control board 451 side, and the main control board 451 is provided with a female power failure response connector to which the male connector is attached. The power failure response connector includes a reset signal transmission terminal electrically connected to the reset signal terminals 461c, 473c of the power failure monitoring devices 461, 473, and a power failure signal transmission terminal electrically connected to the power failure signal terminals 461d, 473d of the power failure monitoring devices 461, 473.

On the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451, the solder surface, which is the plate surface opposite the element mounting surface 451a (in the eighth embodiment, on the back surface of the board, which is the plate surface opposite the element mounting surface 471a of the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471), is provided with a reset signal wiring, which is part or all of the wiring pattern connecting the reset signal transmission terminal of the power failure compatible connector and the reset signal receiving terminal 462 of the MPU 452, and a power failure signal wiring, which is part or all of the wiring pattern connecting the power failure signal transmission terminal of the power failure compatible connector and the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 of the MPU 452.

In the element mounting surfaces 451a, 471a of the main control boards 451, 471, in the areas corresponding to the reset signal wiring and power failure signal wiring provided on the solder surface, a noise prevention plate is provided to prevent the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path from affecting the reset signal and power failure signal. The noise prevention plate is formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil) and is electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451, 471.

The reset side noise countermeasures solid exists between almost the entirety of the reset signal wiring and power outage signal wiring and the game ball supply path. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by the noise countermeasures solid, which exists closer to the reset signal wiring and power outage signal wiring as viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply path). This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will affect the reset signal and power outage signal.

(27) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio and light emission control device 70 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control device 90 may be configured to control the audio and light emission control device 70 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio and light emission control device 70 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio and light emission control device 70 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio and light emission control device 70 to the display control device 90 may be arbitrary.

(28) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, the results of the lottery process for the roles executed when starting a game by operating the start lever may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of winning each role may be calculated using that history information. When a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, this may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of transitioning to the special gaming state may be calculated using that history information. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games played in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, and notifications corresponding to the results of the calculation of various parameters may be given by the gaming machine itself.

Furthermore, the configuration of the above-mentioned alternative embodiment may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-mentioned first to eighth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that controls the game,
a board box (front case body 121 and rear case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and rear case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 and rear case body 313 in the third embodiment) that houses the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (a first connector CN1, a second connector CN2, a third connector CN3, and a fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (an element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The board box is formed with connection openings (first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) through which predetermined connectors are inserted to enable connection of signal transmission means (male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connectors,
The distance between a predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (the lower side surface of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral portion (the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening is set to be smaller than the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector with a main body portion (the housings 101 to 104 and the terminals 111 to 116) of the predetermined connector sandwiched therebetween. a positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance is shorter than the distance between a specific side surface (the upper side surface of the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) existing on the opposite side to the surface and a specific peripheral portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening (the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front-side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment).

According to feature A1, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion, thereby reducing the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent tool between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion. By arranging important wiring for transmitting information on the player's profits, information on the transition of the game state, information on abnormal states, etc., among the wiring for electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board on the specified side where the distance between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening is shorter, it is possible to make it more difficult to commit fraud against the important wiring.

In addition, if the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion, the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion may be configured to be in contact with each other, or may be configured to be spaced apart from each other.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the predetermined connection means (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board extend between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion of the connection opening along the predetermined plate surface.

According to Feature A2, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature A1 above, in which the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, the specified connection means electrically connecting the specified connector to the control board extends so as to straddle the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface. Since the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion to make electrical contact with the specified connection means. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent alteration of a signal transmitted by the specified connection means.

Feature A3. The gaming machine described in Feature A2, characterized in that there is no connection means that extends between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface as the connection means that electrically connects the specific connector and the control board.

According to Feature A3, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature A1 above, in which the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface as a connection means for electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board. Compared to the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is longer, but since there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, characterized in that signals (payout reception command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of first actuation port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of second actuation port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of first winning port detection sensor 42a, detection signal of second winning port detection sensor 43a, detection signal of third winning port detection sensor 44a, detection signal of special electric detection sensor 45a, and detection signal of gate detection sensor 49a) related to the provision of a predetermined benefit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) are transmitted through the predetermined connection means to the control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board.

According to Feature A4, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature A2 above, in which the predetermined connection means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, a signal related to the granting of the predetermined benefit is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. In addition, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature A1 above, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion, thereby reducing the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to electrically contact the predetermined connection means. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to fraudulently change the signal related to the granting of the predetermined benefit.

Feature A5: A specific connection means (the other end terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the specific connector and the control board extends between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface,
A gaming machine as described in feature A2, characterized in that signals related to the awarding of a predetermined benefit (awarding of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) (payout receiving command, payout sending command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning port detection sensor 42a, detection signal of the second winning port detection sensor 43a, detection signal of the third winning port detection sensor 44a, detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted through the specified connection means to a control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board, and signals unrelated to the awarding of the predetermined benefit are transmitted through the specific connection means.

According to Feature A5, the configuration includes the configuration of Feature A1, in which the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion, and the configuration includes the configuration of Feature A2, in which the specified connection means extends between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion so as to straddle the specified plate surface, and a signal related to the granting of a specified benefit is transmitted through the specified connection means, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion to make electrical contact with the specified connection means. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent changes to the signal related to the granting of a specified benefit.

In addition, a signal unrelated to the granting of a specific benefit is transmitted through a specific connection means that extends between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion and contacting the specific connection means, it is possible to prevent the signal related to the granting of a specific benefit from being fraudulently altered by the fraudulent act.

Feature A6: The predetermined connector is provided on the predetermined side surface and includes an engagement means (receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engages with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the engagement means is located on the free end side of the specified connector rather than the area facing the connection opening on the specified side.

According to feature A6, by providing the engaging means, when the specified connector and the signal transmission means are connected to each other, this state can be maintained. By providing the engaging means on the specified side closer to the free end of the specified connector than the area facing the connection opening on the specified side, it is possible to prevent the presence of the engaging means from causing the distance between the specified peripheral portion of the connection opening and the specified side to increase, and the engaging means can hinder the tampering of inserting a tampering tool between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the engagement means is not provided on the specific side.

According to feature A7, the configuration of feature A6 is provided, and the engaging means is provided on the specified side, so that it is possible to maintain the connection state between the specified connector and the signal transmission means. Since the engaging means is provided only on the specified side out of the specified side and the specific side, the play provided between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening can be made small in order to allow the free end side of the specified connector to be inserted into the connection opening, compared to a configuration in which the engaging means is provided on both the specified side and the specific side. This makes it possible to make small the play that exists between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening when the specified connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature A8. The substrate box includes:
a predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed (the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the first embodiment, the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment);
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is set to a mounting position (in the first embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a; in the second embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a; in the third embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower a blocking means (front-side first case fixing boss 183 to front-side third case fixing boss 185 and rear-side first case fixing boss 186 to rear-side third case fixing boss 188 in the first embodiment, front-side first case fixing boss 391 to front-side third case fixing boss 393 and rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to rear-side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) for blocking relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion in a state in which the play existing between the control board and the peripheral portions 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is in the mounting position, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion.

Feature A8 makes it possible to easily maintain a state in which the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion by preventing the specific control board from moving relative to the specific formation portion.

Feature A9. The gaming machine described in Feature A8, characterized in that the blocking means can be in a blocking state (in the first embodiment, the front first case fixing boss 183 to the front third case fixing boss 185 and the rear first case fixing boss 186 to the rear third case fixing boss 188 are fixed with screws, and in the third embodiment, the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396 are fixed with screws) that blocks the control board from moving relative to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position) in the first embodiment.

According to feature A9, by using the blocking means to set the blocking state, the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion can be maintained in the mounted position. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature A10: When the blocking state by the blocking means (in the first embodiment, a state in which the front-side first case fixing boss 183 to the front-side third case fixing boss 185 and the rear-side first case fixing boss 186 to the rear-side third case fixing boss 188 are fixed with screws, and in the third embodiment, a state in which the front-side first case fixing boss 391 to the front-side third case fixing boss 393 and the rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to the rear-side third case fixing boss 396 are fixed with screws) is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set to a separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, In the second embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are positioned in the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction; in the second embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are positioned in the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the vertical direction; and in the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are positioned in the center of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction.
A gaming machine described in feature A8 or A9, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board to the specified forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board to the specified forming portion is the attachment position.

According to feature A10, in a configuration having the configuration of feature A8 and capable of setting the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part can be set to the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part as the separation side position, the work of inserting the specified connector into the connection opening can be made easier. Then, by setting the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part as the mounting position, a state can be created in which the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part is shorter than when the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part is the separation side position.

Feature A11: The predetermined connector is provided on the predetermined side surface and includes an engagement means (receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engages with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
the engaging means is located on the free end side of the predetermined connector relative to a region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side,
The gaming machine described in feature A10, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is greater than or equal to the dimension of the engagement means protruding from the specified side toward the specified peripheral portion.

According to feature A11, by providing an engagement means, the specified connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained in a connected state. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is equal to or greater than the dimension of the engagement means protruding from the specified side surface toward the specified peripheral portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion to the separation side position, the task of inserting the specified connector into the connection opening can be facilitated.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A10 or A11, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is the separation side position, a space is generated between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion, and a space is also generated between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion.

According to feature A12, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board to the specified forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to create a state in which a space is created between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, and also between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion. This makes it possible to facilitate the task of inserting the specified connector into the connection opening by eliminating the need to finely adjust the relative position of the specified connector to the connection opening.

Feature A13. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A10 to A12, characterized in that the board box is provided with a means (second guide portion 182 in the first embodiment, second guide portion 306 in the second embodiment) for guiding the control board or an object integrated with the control board so that the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion becomes the mounting position when the relative position of the control board is changed from the separation side position toward the mounting position.

According to feature A13, in the process of assembling the board box, the control board or an integrated unit of the control board is moved according to the guiding means, thereby changing the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position. This makes it possible to easily change the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position in the process, and also makes it possible to reproducibly create a state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part is the mounting position.

Feature A14. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A13, characterized in that it is provided with a shielding means (connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, connector corresponding plate 314 in the third embodiment) that is located closer to the control board than the connection opening and that is capable of narrowing the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion.

According to feature A14, by narrowing the area of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion, if a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a fraudulent tool into the gap between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent tool will reach the terminals or wiring patterns present on the surface of the main control board. This makes it possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, characterized in that the shielding means is interposed between a predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed in the board box (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) and a connection portion (fixing portions 111b to 116b) that electrically connects the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to feature A15, since the shielding means is located closer to the predetermined formation portion than the connection portion, the shielding means can prevent a tampering tool from contacting the connection portion. Since the shielding means is located closer to the control board than the predetermined formation portion, the shielding means can be prevented from being tampered with.

Feature A16: The shielding means is formed with a shielding side opening (first to fourth cover side through holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, and first to fourth plate side through holes 336 to 339 in the third embodiment) through which the predetermined connector is inserted,
The gaming machine described in feature A14 or A15, wherein the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connection opening.

Feature A16 makes it possible to reduce the area of the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box around the specified connector, compared to a configuration that does not include a shielding means and in which the specified connector is inserted only through the connection opening. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent activity in which a conductive fraud tool is electrically contacted with the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A14 to A16, characterized in that the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to feature A17, when the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves in accordance with the control board. This makes it possible to change the relative position of the connection opening to the specified connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means to the specified connector mounted on the control board from changing.

Feature A18. The substrate box includes:
a predetermined forming portion (a connector group corresponding plate portion 361 a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening portion is formed;
a blocking means (front-side first case fixing boss 391 to front-side third case fixing boss 393 and rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to rear-side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) that blocks relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set to an attachment position;
Equipped with
a distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion is shorter than a distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specific formation portion is the mounting position;
When the blocked state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion can be set to a separation side position (in the third embodiment, for example, a position where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth front-side connector insertion holes 362 to 365),
The gaming machine described in feature A17, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board to the designated forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the designated side surface and the designated peripheral portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board to the designated forming portion is the attachment position.

According to feature A18, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be the mounting position and can also be the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be made easier. Then, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the mounting position, a state can be created in which the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is shorter than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position.

The shielding means is fixed to the control board. The shielding means is fixed to the control board. The shielding means is fixed to the control board. The shielding means and the specified connector move following the control board. Therefore, the relative position of the control board to the specified forming part can be changed from the separation side position to the mounting position while preventing the relative position of the shielding means to the specified connector from changing. By setting the relative position to the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral part becomes longer than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral part, but the relative position of the shielding means to the specified connector does not change even when the relative position is the mounting position. By fixing the shielding means to the control board and setting the relative position to the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral part can be shortened, and the area of the area of the main control board exposed to the outside of the board box around the specific side surface of the specified connector can be reduced.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features A1 to A18. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that controls the game,
a board box (front case body 121 and rear case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and rear case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 and rear case body 313 in the third embodiment) that houses the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (a first connector CN1, a second connector CN2, a third connector CN3, and a fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (an element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The substrate box includes:
a predetermined forming portion (first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) in which a connection opening through which a predetermined connector is inserted is formed to enable connection of a signal transmission means (male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector;
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is set to a mounting position (in the first embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 156a to 159a; in the second embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a; in the third embodiment, a position where the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower a blocking means (front-side first case fixing boss 183 to front-side third case fixing boss 185 and rear-side first case fixing boss 186 to rear-side third case fixing boss 188 in the first embodiment, front-side first case fixing boss 391 to front-side third case fixing boss 393 and rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to rear-side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) for blocking relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion in a state in which the play existing between the control board and the peripheral portions 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a;
Equipped with
When the blocked state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion can be set to a separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, a position where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159; in the second embodiment, for example, a position where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274; in the third embodiment, for example, a position where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the attached position, a predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (the lower side surfaces of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral portion (the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) facing the predetermined side surface are positioned closer to each other in the connection opening than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separated side position.

According to feature B1, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be the mounting position and can also be the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be made easier. Then, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the mounting position, a state can be created in which the predetermined side surface and the opposing predetermined peripheral part are located closer to each other than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, characterized in that the blocking means can be in a blocking state (in the first embodiment, the front first case fixing boss 183 to the front third case fixing boss 185 and the rear first case fixing boss 186 to the rear third case fixing boss 188 are fixed with screws, and in the third embodiment, the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396 are fixed with screws) that blocks the control board from moving relative to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position) in the first embodiment.

According to feature B2, by using the blocking means to set the blocking state, the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion can be maintained in the mounted position. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature B3: The predetermined connector is provided on the predetermined side surface and includes an engagement means (receiving portions 101h to 104h) that engages with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
the engaging means is located on the free end side of the predetermined connector relative to a region facing the connection opening on the predetermined side,
A gaming machine described in feature B1 or B2, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is greater than or equal to the dimension of the engagement means protruding from the specified side toward the specified peripheral portion.

According to feature B3, by providing an engagement means, the specified connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained in a connected state. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is equal to or greater than the dimension protruding from the specified side surface of the engagement means toward the specified peripheral portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion to the separation side position, the task of inserting the specified connector into the connection opening can be facilitated.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B3, characterized in that the board box is provided with a means (second guide portion 182 in the first embodiment, second guide portion 306 in the second embodiment) for guiding the control board or an object integrated with the control board so that the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion becomes the mounting position when the relative position of the control board is changed from the separation side position toward the mounting position.

According to feature B4, in the process of assembling the board box, the control board or an integrated unit of the control board can be moved according to the guiding means to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position. This makes it easier to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position in this process, and also makes it possible to reproducibly create a state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part is the mounting position.

Feature B5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, characterized in that the predetermined connection means (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board extends between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion of the connection opening along the predetermined plate surface.

According to Feature B5, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature B1 above, in which when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is the mounting position, the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion are closer than when the relative position is the separation side position, the specified connection means electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board extends so as to straddle the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface. By setting the relative position as the mounting position and making the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion in a state in which they are close to each other, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud tool such as a wire is inserted between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion to make electrical contact with the specified connection means. This reduces the possibility of a signal transmitted by the specified connection means being fraudulently altered.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in feature B5, characterized in that there is no connection means that extends across the specified plate surface of the control board between a specific side (the upper side of the upper upright wall portions 101b-104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1-CN4) that exists on the opposite side of the specified side across the main body portion (housings 101-104 and terminals 111-116) of the specified connector and a specific peripheral portion (the upper peripheral portions 156a-159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156-159 in the first embodiment, the upper peripheral portions 271a-274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271-274 in the second embodiment, and the upper peripheral portions 362a-365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362-365 in the third embodiment) that faces the specific side in the connection opening.

According to feature B6, in a configuration having the configuration of feature B1, in which when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part is the mounting position, the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part are closer than when the relative position is the separation side position, there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part along the specified plate surface as a connection means for electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming part is the mounting position, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part is longer than when the relative position is the separation side position, but there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part along the specified plate surface, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral part.

Feature B7. A gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, characterized in that signals (payout reception command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of first actuation port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of second actuation port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of first winning port detection sensor 42a, detection signal of second winning port detection sensor 43a, detection signal of third winning port detection sensor 44a, detection signal of special electric detection sensor 45a, and detection signal of gate detection sensor 49a) related to the provision of a predetermined benefit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) are transmitted through the predetermined connection means to the control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board.

According to feature B7, in a configuration having the configuration of feature B5 above, in which the predetermined connection means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, a signal related to the granting of a predetermined benefit is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. Also, in a configuration having the configuration of feature B1 above, when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion are closer to each other than when the relative position is the separation side position, so by setting the relative position as the mounting position, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to electrically contact the predetermined connection means. Therefore, by setting the relative position as the mounting position, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to fraudulently change a signal related to the granting of a predetermined benefit.

Note that any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features B1 to B7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A control board (main control board 61) that controls the game,
a board box (front case body 232 and rear case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 and rear case body 313 in the third embodiment) that houses the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (a first connector CN1, a second connector CN2, a third connector CN3, and a fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (an element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The board box is formed with connection openings (first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) through which predetermined connectors are inserted to enable connection of signal transmission means (male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connectors,
The distance between a predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (the lower side surface of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral portion (the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening is set to be 1/2 mm or less when a main body portion (the housings 101 to 104 and the terminals 111 to 116) of the predetermined connector is sandwiched between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion (the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment). a positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance is shorter than a distance between a specific side surface (the upper side surface of the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) existing on the opposite side to the predetermined side surface and a specific peripheral portion (the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment) facing the specific side surface in the connection opening,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a shielding means (connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, connector corresponding plate 314 in the third embodiment) that is located on the control board side of the connection opening and is capable of narrowing the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion.

According to feature C1, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion, thereby reducing the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent tool between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion. By arranging important wiring for transmitting information on the player's profits, information on the transition of the game state, information on abnormal states, etc., among the wiring for electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board on the specified side where the distance between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening is shorter, it is possible to make it more difficult to commit fraud against the important wiring.

By using the shielding means to narrow the area of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side and the specific peripheral part, if a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a fraudulent tool into the gap between the specific side and the specific peripheral part, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent tool will reach the terminals or wiring patterns present on the surface of the main control board. This makes it possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion, the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion may be configured to be in contact with each other, or may be configured to be spaced apart from each other.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the shielding means is interposed between a predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed in the board box (connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) and a connection portion (fixing portions 111b to 116b) that electrically connects the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to feature C2, since the shielding means is located closer to the predetermined formation portion than the connection portion, the shielding means can prevent a tampering tool from contacting the connection portion. Since the shielding means is located closer to the control board than the predetermined formation portion, the shielding means can be prevented from being tampered with.

Feature C3. The shielding means is formed with a shielding side opening (first to fourth cover side through holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, and first to fourth plate side through holes 336 to 339 in the third embodiment) through which the predetermined connector is inserted,
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connection opening.

Feature C3 makes it possible to reduce the area of the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box around the specified connector, compared to a configuration that does not have a shielding means and in which the specified connector is inserted only through the connection opening. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent activity in which a conductive fraud tool is electrically contacted with the area of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to feature C4, when the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves in accordance with the control board. This makes it possible to change the relative position of the connection opening to the specified connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means to the specified connector mounted on the control board from changing.

Feature C5. The substrate box includes:
a predetermined forming portion (a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and a connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening portion is formed;
a blocking means (front-side first case fixing boss 391 to front-side third case fixing boss 393 and rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to rear-side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) for blocking relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion in a state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set to a mounting position (a position in the third embodiment in which the play existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a);
Equipped with
a distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion is shorter than a distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specific formation portion is the mounting position;
a configuration in which, when the blocking state by the blocking means (in the third embodiment, a state in which the first front case fixing boss 391 to the third front case fixing boss 393 and the first rear case fixing boss 394 to the third rear case fixing boss 396 are screwed together) is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion can be set to a separation side position (in the third embodiment, for example, a position in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present in the center in the up-down direction of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365);
A gaming machine as described in feature C4, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board to the designated forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the designated side surface and the designated peripheral portion is longer than when the relative position of the control board to the designated forming portion is the attachment position.

According to feature C5, in a configuration in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the separation side position, the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening can be made easier. Then, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part to the mounting position, a state can be created in which the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is shorter than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position.

Feature C6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that the predetermined connection means (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board extends between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion of the connection opening along the predetermined plate surface.

According to Feature C6, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature C1 above, in which the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion, the specified connection means electrically connecting the specified connector to the control board extends so as to straddle the specified side and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface. Since the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion to make electrical contact with the specified connection means. This reduces the possibility of fraudulent alteration of a signal transmitted by the specified connection means.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, characterized in that there is no connection means that extends between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface as a connection means for electrically connecting the specific connector and the control board.

According to feature C7, in a configuration having the configuration of feature C1, in which the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface as a connection means for electrically connecting the specified connector and the control board. Compared to the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is longer, but since there is no connection means that extends between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion along the specified plate surface, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature C8. A gaming machine according to Feature C6 or C7, characterized in that signals (payout reception command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of first actuation port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of second actuation port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of first winning port detection sensor 42a, detection signal of second winning port detection sensor 43a, detection signal of third winning port detection sensor 44a, detection signal of special electric detection sensor 45a, and detection signal of gate detection sensor 49a) related to the granting of a predetermined profit (granting a gaming medium to a player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) are transmitted through the predetermined connection means to the control means provided on the control board.

According to Feature C8, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature C6 above, in which the predetermined connection means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, a signal related to the granting of the predetermined benefit is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. In addition, in a configuration having the configuration of Feature C1 above, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion, thereby reducing the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to electrically contact the predetermined connection means. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraud tool between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion to fraudulently change the signal related to the granting of the predetermined benefit.

Feature C9. A specific connection means (the other end terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the specific connector and the control board extends between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface,
A gaming machine as described in feature C6, characterized in that signals related to the awarding of a predetermined benefit (awarding of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) (payout receiving command, payout sending command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning port detection sensor 42a, detection signal of the second winning port detection sensor 43a, detection signal of the third winning port detection sensor 44a, detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted through the specified connection means to a control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board, and signals unrelated to the awarding of the predetermined benefit are transmitted through the specific connection means.

According to feature C9, the configuration includes feature C1, and the positional relationship of the specified connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion. Also, the configuration includes feature C6, and the specified connection means extends between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion so as to straddle the specified plate surface. In this configuration, a signal related to the granting of a specified benefit is transmitted through the specified connection means, which makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion to make electrical contact with the specified connection means. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent changes to the signal related to the granting of a specified benefit.

In addition, a signal unrelated to the granting of a specific benefit is transmitted through a specific connection means that extends between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion along the specific plate surface. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act is committed by inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion and contacting the specific connection means, it is possible to prevent the signal related to the granting of a specific benefit from being fraudulently altered by the fraudulent act.

Feature C10: The predetermined connector includes an engagement means (receiving portions 101h to 104h) that is provided on the predetermined side surface and engages with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the engagement means is located on the free end side of the specified connector rather than the area facing the connection opening on the specified side.

According to feature C10, by providing an engagement means, when the specified connector and the signal transmission means are connected to each other, this state can be maintained. By providing the engagement means on the free end side of the specified connector rather than the area facing the connection opening on the specified side, it is possible to prevent the presence of the engagement means from causing the distance between the specified peripheral portion of the connection opening and the specified side to increase, and the engagement means can hinder the tampering of inserting a tampering tool between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C10, characterized in that the engagement means is not provided on the specific side.

According to feature C11, the configuration of feature C10 is included, and the engaging means is provided on the specified side, so that it is possible to maintain the connection state between the specified connector and the signal transmission means. Since the engaging means is provided only on the specified side out of the specified side and the specific side, the play provided between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening can be made small in order to allow the free end side of the specified connector to be inserted into the connection opening, compared to a configuration in which the engaging means is provided on both the specified side and the specific side. This makes it possible to make small the play that exists between the specified connector and the peripheral portion of the connection opening when the specified connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature C12. The substrate box includes:
a predetermined forming portion (a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and a connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in which the connection opening portion is formed;
a blocking means (front-side first case fixing boss 391 to front-side third case fixing boss 393 and rear-side first case fixing boss 394 to rear-side third case fixing boss 396 in the third embodiment) for blocking relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion in a state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is set to an attachment position (a position in the second embodiment in which the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 271b to 274b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a, and in the third embodiment in which the play existing between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral portions 362a to 365a);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion is in the mounting position, the distance between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion.

Feature C12 makes it easy to prevent the relative movement of the specified control board with respect to the specified formation portion when the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion, thereby maintaining that state.

Feature C13. The gaming machine described in Feature C12, characterized in that the blocking means can be in a blocking state (in the third embodiment, a state in which the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the rear first case fixing boss 394 to the rear third case fixing boss 396 are fixed with screws) that blocks the control board from moving relative to the predetermined forming portion when the relative position of the control board to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position.

According to feature C13, by using the blocking means to set the blocking state, the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified forming portion can be maintained in the mounted position. This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive fraud tool such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion.

Feature C14: When the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion can be set to a separation side position,
A gaming machine described in feature C12 or C13, characterized in that when the relative position of the control board with respect to the specified formation portion is the separation side position, a space is created between the specified side and the specified peripheral portion, and a space is also created between the specific side and the specific peripheral portion.

According to feature C14, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board to the specified forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to create a state in which a space is created between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral portion, and also between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion. This makes it possible to facilitate the task of inserting the specified connector into the connection opening by eliminating the need to finely adjust the relative position of the specified connector to the connection opening.

Note that any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features C1 to C14. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. In a gaming machine equipped with a control board (main control board 401 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment) that controls games,
The control board includes:
A ground means connected to the ground (the GND line 405 and the GND contact portion 407 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and the GND line 435 and the GND contact portion 437 in the sixth embodiment);
power-supplied means (the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact unit 408 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection contact unit 438 in the sixth embodiment) that is provided in parallel with the ground means and to which power is supplied;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a continuity response means (a function for executing the processing of steps S901, S903 and S904 in the main CPU 64) that causes a specific state (a state in which the abnormality notification processing in step S903 is being executed) when the grounding means and the power supplying means are conductive.

According to feature D1, the power supply means is arranged in parallel with the grounding means. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is committed by bringing a conductive fraud tool such as a flathead screwdriver close to the control board, the fraudulent tool is more likely to cause electrical continuity between the grounding means and the power supply means. When electrical continuity occurs between the grounding means and the power supply means, a specific state is reached. Therefore, it is possible to know, based on the occurrence of a specific state, that electrical continuity has been established between the grounding means and the power supply means as a result of a fraudulent act of bringing a fraud tool close to the control board.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that at least one of the grounding means and the power supplying means has a bulge portion bulging out from the board surface of the control board (solder bulge portions 407d, 408d of the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and solder bulge portions 437d, 438d of the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature D2, the bulge protrudes from the surface of the control board, which increases the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool will come into contact with the bulge when the conductive tampering tool is brought close to the main control board. Since at least one of the grounding means and the power-supplied means is configured to have the bulge, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool will come into electrical contact with at least one of the grounding means and the power-supplied means when the conductive tampering tool is brought close to the main control board.

Feature D3: The grounding means includes a ground-side bulge (solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 in the sixth embodiment) bulging from a predetermined plate surface (solder surface 401f in the fourth and fifth embodiments, board rear surface 431f in the sixth embodiment) of the control board,
The power supply receiving means includes a supply-side bulging portion (solder bulging portion 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and solder bulging portion 438d of the tamper detection contact portion 438 in the sixth embodiment) bulging from the predetermined plate surface of the control board,
The gaming machine described in feature D1, wherein the ground side bulge portion and the supply side bulge portion are arranged side by side on the specified plate surface.

According to feature D3, the ground side bulge bulges from the specified plate surface, which increases the possibility that a tampering tool will come into contact with the ground side bulge when the tampering tool is brought close to the specified plate surface. The supply-receiving side bulge bulges from the specified plate surface, which increases the possibility that a tampering tool will come into contact with the supply-receiving side bulge when the tampering tool is brought close to the specified plate surface. The ground side bulge and the supply-receiving side bulge are arranged side by side on the specified plate surface, which increases the possibility that a tampering tool will come into contact with both the ground side bulge and the supply-receiving side bulge when the tampering tool is brought close to the specified plate surface, thereby increasing the possibility that the grounding means and the power-supplied means are in a conductive state. This reduces the possibility that a tampering of bringing a tampering tool close to the specified plate surface of the control board will be overlooked.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the grounding means is formed continuously over a predetermined range (the periphery of the main control board 401, 431) and has a ground area (GND lines 405a to 405d in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and GND lines 435a to 435d in the sixth embodiment) the entirety of which is connected to ground.

According to feature D4, the ground area is formed continuously over a predetermined range, which increases the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool will come into contact with the ground area when the tampering tool is brought close to the control board, compared to a configuration in which the ground area is formed intermittently. Since the entire ground area is connected to the ground, when the tampering tool comes into contact with the ground area and the power-supplied means, and the grounding means and the power-supplied means are brought into electrical conduction, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power-supplied means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power-supplied means is dropped. This makes it easier to identify that the grounding means and the power-supplied means are in an electrically conductive state.

Feature D5: The grounding means is connected to the ground through the ground region and includes a ground-side bulge (solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 in the sixth embodiment) that bulges out from the board surface of the control board;
The gaming machine described in feature D4 is characterized in that the ground side bulge portion is provided intermittently in multiple portions along the ground area.

According to feature D5, the ground side bulge bulges out from the board surface of the control board, increasing the possibility that a tampering tool brought close to the board surface will come into contact with the ground side bulge. Because multiple ground side bulges are provided intermittently along the ground area, the possibility that a tampering tool brought close to the board surface on which the ground side bulge is provided in the control board will come into contact with at least one of the multiple ground side bulges.

Since the ground side bulge is connected to the ground through the ground region, when the tampering tool comes into contact with the ground side bulge and the power supply means, and the ground means and the power supply means are brought into electrical continuity, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power supply means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power supply means is dropped. This makes it easier to identify that the ground means and the power supply means are in an electrical continuity state.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D5, characterized in that the power supply means is formed continuously over a specific range (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the range in which the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d are formed on the main control board 401, and in the sixth embodiment, the range in which the fraud detection lines 436a to 436d are formed on the main control board 431), and has a power supply area (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d, and in the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection lines 436a to 436d) to which the power is supplied in its entirety.

According to feature D6, the power-supplied area is formed continuously over a specific range, which increases the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool will come into contact with the power-supplied area when the tampering tool is brought close to the control board, compared to a configuration in which the power-supplied area is formed intermittently. Since power is supplied to the entire power-supplied area, when the tampering tool comes into contact with the power-supplied area and the grounding means, at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power-supplied means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power-supplied means is dropped can be created, as the power-supplied means and the grounding means are in a conductive state, regardless of where the tampering tool comes into contact with the power-supplied area. This makes it easier to identify that the grounding means and the power-supplied means are in a conductive state.

Feature D7: The power supply means is supplied with the power through the power supply area and includes a supply-side bulge portion (solder bulge portion 408d of the tamper detection contact portion 408 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and solder bulge portion 438d of the tamper detection contact portion 438 in the sixth embodiment) that bulges from the board surface of the control board,
The gaming machine described in feature D6 is characterized in that the supply-receiving side bulge portion is provided intermittently in multiple portions along the power supply area.

According to feature D7, the supply-receiving side bulge bulges from the board surface of the control board, increasing the possibility that a tampering tool brought close to the board surface will come into contact with the supply-receiving side bulge. Because multiple supply-receiving side bulges are provided intermittently along the power-supplied area, the possibility that a tampering tool brought close to the board surface on which the supply-receiving side bulge is provided in the control board will come into contact with at least one of the multiple supply-receiving side bulges.

By supplying power to the supply-receiving bulge through the power-supplied area, when the tampering tool comes into contact with the supply-receiving bulge and the grounding means, and the grounding means and the power-supplied means are brought into electrical continuity, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power-supplied means is reduced and a state in which the voltage in the power-supplied means is reduced. This makes it easier to identify that the grounding means and the power-supplied means are in an electrical continuity state.

Feature D8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D7, characterized in that the grounding means and the power supplying means are each provided along the periphery of the board surface of the control board.

According to feature D8, when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to a control board from the peripheral side of the control board, the tampering tool can create a state in which the grounding means and the power-supplied means are electrically connected before the tampering tool comes into contact with the electronic components mounted on the control board. This makes it possible to detect the tampering at an early stage.

Feature D9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D8, characterized in that the grounding means and the power supplying means are each provided around the entire periphery of the board surface of the control board.

Feature D9, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the grounding means and the power supplying means is provided only on a portion of the peripheral portion of the plate surface of the control board, can increase the likelihood that a conductive tampering tool will cause electrical continuity between the grounding means and the power supplying means when the conductive tampering tool is brought close to the control board from the peripheral portion side of the control board. This makes it possible to detect the tampering at an early stage.

Feature D10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D9, characterized in that the grounding means and the power supplying means are each provided at least on a plate surface (solder surface 401f in the fourth and fifth embodiments, board back surface 431f in the sixth embodiment) where there are fixed points by soldering between the various electronic components mounted on the control board and the control board.

According to feature D10, when a conductive tampering tool is brought close to a board surface where the various electronic components mounted on the control board are fixed by solder to the control board, the possibility that the tampering tool will cause electrical continuity between the grounding means and the power-supplied means can be increased. When a tampering act is committed by bringing a conductive tampering tool into contact with the solder fixing point and its surroundings, there is a risk that signals transmitted from the various electronic components or signals received by the various electronic components will be tampered with. In contrast, by using a configuration that can detect the tampering act of bringing a conductive tampering tool close to a board surface where the solder fixing point is present, the possibility that the tampering will be committed without the manager of the game hall noticing is reduced.

Feature D11: The conduction response means is in the specific state when the ground means and the power supply means are conductive in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 402 in the fifth embodiment) provided on the control board is stopped,
This gaming machine includes a means for executing a specific process (an abnormality notification process in step S1002) based on the fact that the continuity response means is in the specific state (a function for executing the processes in steps S1001 and S1002 in the main CPU 64);
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature D11, when a tampering action is taken by bringing a conductive tampering tool close to the control board in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, and the tampering tool brings the grounding means and the power-supplied means into a conductive state, a specific process is executed. This makes it possible to grasp tampering action taken in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped based on the execution of the specific process.

Note that any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features D1 to D11. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, and feature group D can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device that is responsible for the main control of the game, and the control device is equipped with a control board. The control board is composed of electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors mounted on a printed wiring board.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to effectively prevent fraudulent acts against the electronic components mounted on the circuit board, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A control board (main control board 451 in the seventh embodiment, main control board 471 in the eighth embodiment) on which a control means (MPU 452 in the seventh embodiment, MPU 472 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling games is mounted;
A signal transmission means (power failure monitoring device 461 in the seventh embodiment, power failure monitoring device 473 in the eighth embodiment) capable of transmitting a predetermined signal (reset signal or power failure signal) to the control means using a predetermined signal path (reset signal wiring 464 or power failure signal wiring 465 in the seventh embodiment, reset signal wiring 476 or power failure signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment) provided on the control board;
Equipped with
The control means is configured to not execute a process for progressing a game (main process and timer interrupt process in the master CPU 64) based on a specific state (a state in which a reset signal is lowered from a HI state to a LOW state, or a state in which a power failure signal is lowered from a HI state to a LOW state) of the reception state of the predetermined signal through the predetermined signal path,
The control board is provided with a suppression means (a noise suppression solid 466 in the seventh embodiment, and a noise suppression solid 485 in the eighth embodiment) capable of suppressing the addition of electrical noise to the specified signal path from the second board surface side, in an area opposite the specified signal path across the control board on a second board surface (the element mounting surface 451a in the seventh embodiment, the element mounting surface 471a in the eighth embodiment) which is the board surface opposite to a first board surface on which the specified signal path is provided (the solder surface opposite the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in the seventh embodiment, and the back surface of the board opposite the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 in the eighth embodiment).

According to feature E1, the control means is in a state where processing for progressing the game is not executed based on the fact that the reception status of the predetermined signal has become a specific status. Therefore, when the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the reception status of the predetermined signal becomes a specific status due to the noise, the processing for progressing the game is not executed in a situation where the game should be progressed. In the control board, a suppression means is provided in an area on the opposite side of the control board to the predetermined signal path on the second board surface, which is the board surface opposite to the first board surface on which the predetermined signal path is provided. Therefore, when electrical noise occurs on the opposite side of the suppression means to the predetermined signal path, it is possible to prevent the noise from affecting the predetermined signal transmitted to the control means using the predetermined signal path. This makes it possible to prevent a state where processing for progressing the game is not executed due to electrical noise.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the suppression means is a circuit area (noise countermeasure plane 466 in the seventh embodiment, and noise countermeasure plane 485 in the eighth embodiment) formed on the control board and connected to ground.

According to feature E2, in the control board, a circuit area connected to ground is provided as a suppression means in an area on the opposite side of the control board from the specified signal path on the second board surface, which is the board surface opposite to the first board surface on which the specified signal path is provided. Therefore, electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppression means from the specified signal path can be absorbed by the suppression means located before the specified signal path and released to ground. This makes it possible to prevent electrical noise from affecting the specified signal transmitted to the control means using the specified signal path.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Features E1 or E2, characterized in that the first board surface is the board surface on which the control means and the control board are fixed by soldering (the reset signal receiving terminal 462 or the power failure signal receiving terminal 463 in the seventh embodiment, and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 or the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment).

According to feature E3, in a configuration having the configuration of feature E1 above and in which a predetermined signal path is provided on the first plate surface of a control board, the fixing point by soldering the control means and the control board is present on the first plate surface. Therefore, the entire signal path along which the signal transmission means in the control board transmits a predetermined signal to the control means can be provided on the first plate surface, and the control board can be configured such that a suppression means is provided in an area on the opposite side of the control board from the entire signal path on the second plate surface. As a result, before electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the signal path across the suppression means reaches the signal path, the noise can be blocked by the suppression means that is present before the signal path as viewed from the noise source.

Feature E4: The second plate surface is the plate surface on which the control means and the control board are fixed by soldering (the reset signal receiving terminal 474 or the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment),
A signal path (a reset signal wiring 476 or a power failure signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment) capable of transmitting the predetermined signal from the signal transmitting means to the control means is
A specific signal path (the reset side third wiring 476c or the power failure side third wiring 477c in the eighth embodiment) provided on the second plate surface and electrically connected to the control means using the fixed portion between the control means and the control board;
A conductive path (the reset side second through hole 482 or the power failure side second through hole 484 in the eighth embodiment) that is provided through the control board and that connects the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path;
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature E4, the control means and the control board are fixed by soldering on the second board surface, and a signal path for transmitting a predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmitting means to the control means is provided, which includes a predetermined signal path on the first board surface, a specific signal path on the second board surface electrically connected to the control means, and a conductive path that connects the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path. The configuration of feature E1 is provided, and the control board is configured to have a suppression means provided in an area on the second board surface opposite the predetermined signal path across the control board, so that the influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppression means from the predetermined signal path is prevented from reaching the predetermined signal path. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which all of the signal paths for transmitting the predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmitting means to the control means are provided on the second board surface, the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppression means from the predetermined signal path will affect the predetermined signal can be reduced.

Feature E5. The gaming machine described in Feature E4, characterized in that the control means is mounted on the second panel side of the control board.

According to feature E5, the configuration includes features E1 and E4, and a predetermined signal path that is part of the signal path that transmits a predetermined signal from the signal transmission means to the control means is provided on the first plate surface, and suppression means is provided on the control board in an area on the second plate surface opposite the predetermined signal path across the control board. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise will affect the predetermined signal while the predetermined signal is being transmitted through the predetermined signal path. Therefore, even if the control means is mounted on the second plate surface, it is possible to reduce the possibility that electrical noise will affect the predetermined signal.

Feature E6: The signal transmission means transmits the predetermined signal when the operating power becomes a power failure compatible power supply;
the specific situation is a situation in which the predetermined signal is received,
The gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the control means is provided with a means for executing a power outage response process (power outage information storage process) for stopping operation thereafter based on receiving the specified signal (a function for executing the processes of steps S1101 to S1104 in the main CPU 64).

According to feature E6, the control means executes a power outage response process based on receiving a predetermined signal. By executing the power outage response process before the supply of operating power is completely stopped, the operation of the control means can be safely terminated. In addition, after the power supply is restored, the operation of the control means can be appropriately started.

If electrical noise affects the specified signal and the control means mistakenly determines that a specific situation has occurred due to the noise, the control means will execute power outage response processing even though the operating power is not set to respond to power outages. In response to this, the configuration of feature E1 described above is provided, and the control board is configured such that a suppression means is provided in an area on the second plate surface opposite the specified signal path across the control board, preventing the effects of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppression means from reaching the specified signal path. This makes it possible to prevent the control means from executing power outage response processing due to the effects of noise even though the operating power is not set to respond to power outages.

Feature E7: The signal transmission means stops transmitting the predetermined signal when the operating power becomes a power failure compatible power supply;
the specific situation is a situation in which the predetermined signal is not received,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the control means stops operation based on the situation where the specified signal is not being received.

According to feature E7, the control means stops operating when a situation occurs in which the specified signal is not being received. This allows the operation of the control means to be appropriately stopped when the supply of operating power is stopped.

If electrical noise affects the specified signal and the noise causes a situation in which the control means does not receive the specified signal, the operation of the control means will stop even though the operating power is not set to withstand power outages. In response to this, the configuration of feature E1 described above is provided, and the control board is configured such that a suppression means is provided in an area on the second plate surface opposite the specified signal path across the control board, preventing the effects of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppression means from reaching the specified signal path. This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the control means from stopping due to the effects of noise even though the operating power is not set to withstand power outages.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features E1 to E7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device that is responsible for the main control of the game, and the control device is equipped with a control board. The control board is composed of electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors mounted on a printed wiring board.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to effectively suppress the effects of noise on the signal, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 42a... First winning port detection sensor, 43a... Second winning port detection sensor, 44a... Third winning port detection sensor, 45a... Special power detection sensor, 46a... First operating port detection sensor, 47a... Second operating port detection sensor, 49a... Gate detection sensor, 61... Main control board, 61e... Element mounting surface, 63... MPU, 64... Main CPU, 101-104... Housing, 101b-104b... Upper side upright wall portion, 101c to 104c...lower upright wall portion, 101h to 104h...receiving portion for locking, 111...one end terminal, 111b to 116b...fixing portion, 112...other end terminal, 113...terminal, 114...terminal, 115...one end terminal, 116...other end terminal, 121...front case body, 122...rear case body, 155a...connector group corresponding plate portion, 156 to 159...first to fourth connector insertion holes, 156a to 159 a...upper peripheral portion, 156b to 159b...lower peripheral portion, 182...second guide portion, 183...front first case fixing boss, 184...front second case fixing boss, 185...front third case fixing boss, 186...rear first case fixing boss, 187...rear second case fixing boss, 188...rear third case fixing boss, 232...front case body, 233...connector cover, 234...rear case body, 267a...connector Connector group corresponding plate portion, 271-274...first to fourth connector insertion holes, 271a-274a...upper peripheral portion, 271b-274b...lower peripheral portion, 275-278...first to fourth cover side insertion holes, 306...second guide portion, 311...circuit board box, 312...front case body, 313...rear case body, 314...connector corresponding plate, 336-339...first to fourth plate side insertion holes, 361a...connector Group corresponding plate portion, 362 to 365...first to fourth front side connector insertion holes, 362a to 365a...upper peripheral portion, 362b to 365b...lower peripheral portion, 391...front side first case fixing boss, 392...front side second case fixing boss, 393...front side third case fixing boss, 394...rear side first case fixing boss, 395...rear side second case fixing boss, 396...rear side third case fixing boss, 401...main control board, 401 f...solder surface, 402...MPU, 405...GND line, 405a to 405d...GND lines, 406...fraud detection line, 406a to 406d...fraud detection line, 407...GND contact portion, 407d...solder bulge portion, 408...fraud detection contact portion, 408d...solder bulge portion, 431...main control board, 431f...solder surface, 435...GND line, 435a to 435d...GND lines, 436...fraud Detection lines, 436a to 436d...tamper detection lines, 437...GND contact portion, 437d...solder bulge portion, 438...tamper detection contact portion, 438d...solder bulge portion, 451...main control board, 452...MPU, 461...power failure monitoring device, 462...reset signal receiving terminal, 463...power failure signal receiving terminal, 464...reset signal wiring, 465...power failure signal wiring, 466...noise countermeasure plane, 471...main control board Board, 472...MPU, 473...power failure monitoring device, 474...reset signal receiving terminal, 475...power failure signal receiving terminal, 476...reset signal wiring, 476c...reset side third wiring, 477...power failure signal wiring, 477c...power failure side third wiring, 482...reset side second through hole, 484...power failure side second through hole, 485...noise prevention ground, CN1 to CN4...first connector to fourth connector.

Claims (1)

A control board that controls games;
a board box that houses the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A predetermined connector is mounted on a predetermined surface of the control board,
a connection opening through which a predetermined connector is inserted to enable connection of a signal transmission means to the predetermined connector is formed in the board box;
a positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set such that a distance between a predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and a predetermined peripheral portion facing the predetermined side surface in the connection opening is shorter than a distance between a specific side surface of the predetermined connector that is present on the opposite side of the body of the predetermined connector from the predetermined side surface and a specific peripheral portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening,
The predetermined connector is
an engagement means provided on the predetermined side surface so as to be located closer to a free end of the predetermined connector than an area facing the connection opening, the engagement means engaging with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector;
a predetermined connection means that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board and extends along the predetermined plate surface between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral portion of the connection opening;
Equipped with
The substrate box has an opposing portion that faces the predetermined plate surface,
The engaging means is located on a side of the opposing portion closer to the specified plate surface than the portion furthest from the specified plate surface.

Images